Home

0 - Pontiac

1. before your next oil change When it s very cold you should use SAE 5W 30 These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity or thickness Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W 50 DO NOT USE SAE 20 30 OA ANY OTHER GRADE NOT RECOMMENDED 3800 or 3800 Supercharged Engine 6 17 Use only engine oil with the American Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines Starburst symbol Failure to use the recommended oil can result in engine damage not covered by your warranty GM Goodwrench oil meets all the requirements for your vehicle If you are in an area where the temperature falls below 20 F 29 consider using either an SAE 5W 30 synthetic oil or an SAE 0W 30 oil Both will provide easier cold starting and better protection for your engine at extremely low temperatures Engine Oil Additives Don t add anything to your oil Your Pontiac dealer is ready to advise if you think something should be added When to Change Engine Oil If any one of these is true for you use the short trip city maintenance schedule Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles 8 to 16 km This is particularly important when outside temperatures are below freezing 8 Most trips include extensive idling such as frequent driving in stop and go traffic Most trips are through dusty areas You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrie
2. 6 61 DIU Level Check Sarg ep are 7 39 rar Cil 13 Running While 2 19 Specificali ns DIA O73 aeg c aae Weenie aed eee 2 16 er MET 6 12 Adding iss el lie nere 6 14 cass EAA E EEA a e S TRY TA 4 6 18 incu rrr eee tbl ek 6 14 DiBl riv ye WT re TA 6 19 When io Change E YR RR 6 18 UA ce cite eee et IR Yo 6 4 Exhaust Engine 2 11 2 29 4 28 4 35 EXE LISBRIIE 2 42 2 45 Fabric cleaning EXE S pares pod Fan Button Automatic and Auxiliary Temp Control 3 6 Fan Knob Climate Control System 3 2 Filing Your MEE 6 5 9 4 PIRE Ad ATE R0 6 9 Ea LT EAM X Pa 6 6 Finish DUMABE 6 62 First Gear Automatic Transaxle 2 22 Fixed Mast Antenna 3 32 ee pe ei rnm ER mo elus 2 33 Flashers Hazard Warning 5 2 Flat Tire Changing Kd Um Fluids and Lubricants 2 2 usse rr rn 7 44
3. With your foot on the brake pedal move the shift lever through each gear range pausing for about three seconds in each range Then position the shift lever in PARK P e Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes 3100 Engine 6 23 A100 Engine 3800 or 3800 Supercharged Engine 1 Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel Push it back in all the way wait three seconds and then pull it back out again ba How to Add Fluid Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of transaxle fluid to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index If the fluid level is low add only enough of the proper fluid to bring the level into the cross hatched area on the dipstick Pull out the dipstick 2 Using a long neck funnel add enough fluid at the dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level It doesn t take much fluid generally less than one pint 0 5 L Don t overfill We recommend you use only fluid labeled DEXRON III because fluid with that label is made especially for your automatic transaxle Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRON 1IT is not covered by your new vehicle warranty 3800 or 3800 Supercharged Engine 3 Check both sides of the dipstick and read the lower level The fluid level must be in the cross hatched area After adding fluid recheck the fluid level as described 4 If the fluid level is in the
4. 7 3 Short TripiCity Definition 7 3 Short Trip City Intervals Fact eo RIEN Opa 7 5 Your Vehicle and the Environment 7 2 Maintenance Underbod y Pg may ofa rd Maintenance When Trailer Towing 4 38 Malfunction Indicator Lamp 2 70 Manual Front Seat 5 suere harm 1 2 20 4 x ki va cn Eisen Mirrors plate WES I eiii ru E REEL eis Seale SP RE 2 53 Convex IC ELIT 2 54 Electrochromic Day Night Rearview CETOTITA E CE 2 53 Inside Day Night Rearview 2 53 Power 2 54 ERR E es 2 59 6 4 Mode Buttons Automatic and Auxiliary Temp Control 3 6 Mode Knob Climate Control System 3 2 Mountain Roads dai ets 4 23 Multifunction be ceeds wale os 2 32 B E PERIERE LL RE REN U vie I T 2 57 Neutral Automatic Transaxle 2 20 la 2513 Might Vision Lak rd 4 16 acids core eR re ERR 2 63 domiti TH uus raras race zzz ua aura 2 63 eO ERA 4 13 UT BOR sey capone sororis a m ee ee E 6 12 Oil Warning Light Sx 4 8
5. 2 68 Trunk Ajar Waring 2224 2 76 Loadm gages dal awe lave ge ee ere 4 29 DEMS is array hat anise rai a CLTC PIRE eee 2 4 Agtomi Door E RES 2 6 2 46 Cylinders DIO A ie VE mE l as Rae eo ER Ignition Tran saxle E 7 42 Key Lock sd CR EUR 7 40 Power Door 2 9 Tmnk 2 12 Locks and Lighting Choices 2 44 Low Coolant Warning Light Mia creer rere Ey caca 2 77 Low Oil Level SLATE ET 2 74 Low Trac Light 2 69 Low Washer Fluid Light 2 76 Lubricants and 7 44 9 6 Lubrication Service Body 7 40 Tan E SOME 1 4 Miintenance Normal Replacement Parts 6 73 Maintenance Record 7 46 Maintenance Schedule Weeds data dE eter 7 2 Long Trip Highway Definition sese s Long Trip Highway 7 6 Owner Checks and Services EROS 7 39 Periodic Maintenance Inspections 7 43 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 12 7 44 Scheduled Maintenance
6. V6 Displacement 231 CID 3 BL L36 Firing Order EU 1 6 5 4 3 2 Thermostat Temperature 95 F 91 HOrsepower ava sa ava qid erasa 3800 Supercharged Code 1 Engine Oil Filter Engine Specifications All Engines EREEREER Type 4 V6 PCY Valve Displacement 231 CID 3 8L L67 renew roster ane neta Engines AC Type RC27 Thermostat Temperature I95 F 91 C Spark Plugs PEED OME xS HE m 3100 Code AC Type 41 940 Vehicle Dimensions Gap 0 060 1 52 mm 3800 Code AC Type 41 921 RES 110 5 280 7 cm Tread Width 0 060 1 52 mm Front oo BL 156 8 em 3800 Supercharged Code 1 AC Type 41 921 MH TIO ELK o 61 17 155 2 Gap 0 060 1 52 mm Overall Length 196 5 499 1 em Wiper Blades Overall Width 72 7 184 5 em 52122582412 272252220222 Hook Overall Height 54 7 139 0 em oco SC 20 50 8 cm Air Conditioning Refrigerants Not all air conditioning refrigerants are the same If the air conditioning system in your vehicle needs refrigerant be sure the proper refrigerant is used If Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts Air Cleaner Filter AT NR ee eee eee nant a
7. 1 36 CINE o i pida CERERI 7 40 Use During ipee PUTES TIGE ERXNSQU TUS av 1 21 Retained Accessory 22 2 2 42 Why Thy 1 9 Reverse Automatic Transaxle Phe 2 20 safety Chains HE Ee MIU OMM 4 35 Right Front Passenger Position 1 22 Safety Defects Reporting keistec s rv qq daa Vis a Iia 8 10 Roadside 8 6 Safety Warnings and Symbols ii Roadside Assistance Canadian 8 8 Scheduled Mamtenance Services Va rok e d dh 7 4 Rocking Your 5 35 Seat Lumbur Control 1 4 Roof Console Reading FA vd aaa a dre wer ee Seatback Rotation Tires ee tee SEL a i L ELS a is wp DAS Abn a TE TE TO este eg wren EOF R clicing Front 1 98 Seats 1 5 Manual Front Ies Er DEEP 1 2 Power Def 1 3 Restraint Systems 2 222 1 1 OEIL Controls lcs ce ere mera mre ors 1 2 Two Way Manual 1 2 Second Gear Automatic Transaxle 2 21 ilu s repere mde TNR NAT Epi EX mu 6 2 Bulletins
8. Change engine oil and filter or every C Inspect fuel tank cap and lines for damage 12 months whichever occurs first or leaks Inspect fuel cap gasket for any An Emission Control Service damage Replace parts as needed Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and An Emission Control Service See footnote T Rotation in the Index for proper rotation C For supercharged engines only Check the pattern and additional information supercharger oil level and add oil as needed See footnote or every 36 months whichever occurs 5 XE 5 An Emission Control Service Lubricants in this section An Emission Control Service See footnote T pare ACTUAL MILEAGE _ SERVICED Long Trip Highway Maintenance Schedule 37 500 Miles 62 500 km 45 000 Miles 75 000 km LJ Change engine oil and filter or every Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first 12 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service An Emission Control Service CI Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and C Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information pattern and additional information See footnote See footnote ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY song Trip Highway Maintenance Schedule 50 000 Miles 83 000 km Change
9. A Windshield Washer Fluid B Radiator Fill Cap C Remote Positive Battery Terminal D Power Steering Fluid Reservoir E Engine Oil Dipstick Engine Oil Fill Cap Automatic Transaxle Dipstick Brake Fluid Reservoir Engine Coolant Reservoir Air Cleaner 6 11 Before closing the hood be sure all the filler caps are on properly Then just pull the hood down and clase 1t firmly 3800 Supercharged Engine If Equipped Your Pontiac may have 3800 Supercharged engine The supercharger is a device which is designed to pump more air into the engine than it would normally use This air mixed with fuel creates increased engine power Since the supercharger is a pump and is driven from an engine accessory drive belt increased pressure is available at all driving conditions The powertrain control module PCM works with a vacuum control to regulate the increased pressure required during specific driving conditions When this increased pressure or hoost is not desired such as during idling and light throttle cruising the excess air that the supercharger is pumping is routed through a bypass of these controls working together provide high performance character and fuel efficiency in the 3800 Supercharged engine Engine Oil If the LOW OIL LEVEL light on the instrument panel comes on it means you need to check your engine oil level right away For more information see Low Oil Level Lig
10. e eR E 2 40 Foreign Countries GEE age erin ies areca aie 5 5 French Language Manual Front Reading 2 43 Fron TONM Lie erra REOS TTE e ese OG EO CE 6 3 Canadian dd tea a ica a 6 3 Filing Your TRE acce ne Es 6 5 UE Lio iuaca da DEAE NR REY TI AA ETIS A ATE 2 77 Foreign Countrims 6 5 Fuses and Circuit Breakers 6 56 Gages Engine Coolant Temperature E E nie Pus eee EFA ESES EE E TE E AEE EEN 2 77 ren Corie 4 30 Gear Positions Automatic Transaxle ROE ere 2 19 Bit 2 54 Gross Axle Weight Rating iSi e Eia 4 20 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 4 30 Chide FrimQlla EE aa ii 2552 VENE 4 30 T 2222 6 37 Hazard Warning Flashers 2 Head Restraints VUES TTD RETE 7 Headlamps arc rrr geni Bulb Replacement Mg date 6 37 High Low Beam Changer 2 33 E ig RU E Cie hls AJEA 6 66 rere mrt Aet 2 83 Care of DAUERTE E ES 2 86 Hearing Impaired Customer Assistance ee Ree 8 5 3 4 3 8 Hi
11. Pontiac strives to give you a worry free ownership of your vehicle and we realize the inconvenience of being without a So Pontiac has come up with a way to eliminate any frustrations you might have when trying to get a ride to work or wondering how you will get home Well your worries are over Pontiac provides no cost transportation when you bring your 1997 Pontiac in for warranty service It applies to any repair covered under the 3 year 36 000 mile 60 000 km limited warranty and to any 1997 Pontiac requiring repair as a result of product recall or special policy situations For same day service you are entitled ta one way shuttle service of up to 10 miles 16 km If the vehicle requires multiple day repairs you re entitled to either a Pontiac loaner reimbursement for rental car up to 30 day for up to five days Some state insurance regulations make it impractical to rent vehicles to people under 21 years of age If you are under 21 and have difficulty renting a vehicle Pontiac will reimburse you up to 30 day for any documented transportation you receive In Canada please consult your GM dealer for information on Courtesy Transportation GM Participation an Alternative Dispute Resolution Program This program is available in all 50 states and the District of Columbia Canadian owners reler to your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet General Motors reserves the right to cha
12. While driving on a surface with reduced traction try your best to avoid sudden steering acceleration or braking including engine braking by shifting to a lower gear Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide You may not realize the surface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding Learn to recognize warning clues such s enough water ice or packed snow on the road to make a mirrored surface and slow down when you have any doubt Remember Any anti lock brake system ABS helps avoid only the braking skid 4 15 Driving at Night Night driving is more dangerous than day driving One reason is that some drivers are likely to be impaired by alcohol or drugs with night vision problems or by fatigue Here are some tips on night driving Drive defensively e Don t drink and drive Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the glare from headlamps behind you Since you can t see as well you may need to slow down and keep more space between you and other vehicles Slow down especially on higher speed roads Your headlamps can light up only so much road ahead In remote areas watch for animals lf you re tired pull off the road in a safe place and rest Night Vision No one can see as well at night as in the daytime But as we get older these differences increase A 50 year old driver may require at least twice as much light to see the same thing at night as a 20 year ol
13. the weight of the trailer the weight of the trailer tongue and the total weight on your vehicle s tires Weight of the Trailer How heavy can a trailer safely be It should never weigh more than 1 000 pounds 450 kg But even that can be too heavy It depends on how you plan to use your rig For example speed altitude road grades outside temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important And it can also depend on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or advice or you can write us at Customer Assistance Center Fontiac Division One Pontiac Plaza Pontiac MI 48340 2952 In Canada write to General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario LIH 8P7 Weight of the Trailer Tongue The tongue load A of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects the total capacity weight of your vehicle The capacity weight includes the curb weight of the vehicle any cargo you may carry in it and the people who will riding in the vehicle And if you will tow a trailer you must subtract the tongue load from your vehicle s capacity weight because your vehicle will be carrying that weight too See Loading Your Vehicle in the Index for more information about your vehicle s maximum load capacity If you re using a weight carrying hi
14. LOW COOLANT If this light comes on your system is low on coolant and the engine may overheat See Engine Coolant in the Index and have your vehicle serviced SOON VOU 2 75 Low Washer Fluid Warning Light Trunk Ajar Warning Light This light will come on when your ignition is on and the fluid container is low This light will come on if your trunk is not completely closed Remember driving without washer fluid can be dangerous A bad mud splash can block your vision You could collide with another vehicle Check your washer fluid often and add only the proper fluid Sce Windshield Washer Fluid in the Index 276 Fuel Gage Low Fuel Light If your fuel is low a light will come on and stay on until you add fuel It will also come on for a few seconds when you first turn on the ignition as a check to show you it s working If it doesn t come on then see your dealer Your fuel gage tells you about how much fuel you have left when the ignition is on When the indicator nears E you sull have a little fuel left but you should get more soon Here are some things owners ask about AII these situations are normal and do not show a problem with your fuel gage service station the pump shuts off before the gage reads FULL F It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the gage indicated
15. 3100 Engine 3800 or 3800 Supercharged Engine When to Check Power Steering Fluid It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or you hear unusual noise loss in this system could indicate a problem Have the system inspected and repaired 6 M How Check Power Steering Fluid When the engine compartment is cool unscrew the and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag Replace the cap and completely tighten it Then remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick When the engine compartment is hot the level should be at the H or the level should be at the C or COLD mark If the fluid is at the ADD mark you should add fluid 3100 Engine HOT mark When its cold 3800 or 3800 Supercharged Engine What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of fluid to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index Always use the proper fluid Failure to use the proper fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals 6 31 Windshield Washer Fluid Adding Washer Fluid What to Use When you need windshield washer fluid be sure to read the manufacturer s instructions before use If you will be operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature may fall below freezing use a fluid that has sufficient protection against freezing Your vehicle may be equipped with one of the f
16. Brake Adjustment Every time you apply the brakes with or without the vehicle moving your brakes adjust for wear Replacing Brake System Parts The braking system on a modern vehicle is complex Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well tagether if the vehicle is to have really good braking Vehicles we design and test have top quality GM brake parts in them as your Pontiac does when it is new When vou replace parts of your braking system for example when your brake linings wear down and you have to have new ones put in be sure you get new approved GM replacement parts If you don t your brakes may no longer work properly For example if someone puts in brake hnings that are wrong for your vehicle the balance between your front and rear brakes can change for the worse The braking performance you ve come to expect can change in many other ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement brake parts Battery Every new Pontiac has a Delco Freedom battery You never have to add water to one of these When it s time for a new battery we recommend a Delco Freedom battery Get one that has the replacement number shown on the original battery s label T Vehicle Storage Bulb Replacement If you re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days or In this section you ll find directions for changing the more take off the black negative cable from the battery bulbs in some of the lamps on your Grand Prix See
17. This manual includes the latest information at the time it was printed We reserve the right to make changes in the product after that time without further notice For vehicles first sold in Canada substitute the name General Motors of Canada Limited for Pontiac Division whenever it appears in this manual Please keep this manual in your Pontiac so it will be there if you ever need it when you re on the road If you sell the vehicle please leave this manual in it so the new owner car use il Litho in U S A Part No 10405301 A Third Edition We support voluntary technician certification WE SUPPORT VOLUNTARY CERTIFICATION THROLKH reditura fce AUTOMOTIVE SERVICE EXCELLENCE For Canadian Owners Who Prefer a French Language Manual Aux propri taires canadiens Vous pouvez vous procurer un exemplaire de ce guide en frangais chez YOLE concessionaire OL DGN Marketing Services Ltd 1500 Bonhill Rd Mississauga Ontario L5T Copyright General Motors Corporation 1996 All Rights Reserved How to Use this Manual Many people read their owner s manual from beginning to end when they first receive their new vehicle If you do this it will help you learn about the features and controls for your vehicle In this manual you ll find that pictures and words work together to explain things quickly Index good place to look for what you need is the Index
18. _ ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY 30 000 Miles 50 000 km C Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information Replace air cleaner filter See footnote An Emission Control Service Inspect fuel tank cap and lines for damage or leaks Inspect fuel cap gasket for any damage Replace parts as needed An Emission Control Service See footnote T For supercharged engines only Check the supercharger oil level and add oil as needed or every 36 months whichever occurs first See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in this section An Emission Control Service See footnote T ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY 7 12 33 000 Miles 55 000 36 000 Miles 60 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every _ Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first 3 months whichever occurs first Emission Control Service An Emission Control Service Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote SERVICED BY park ACTUAL MILEAGE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED T3 39 000 Miles 65 000 km 42 000 Miles 70 000 km 1 C
19. d AAA 1 51 Pub PRODRUGS viov E 6 37 Roadside Assist nce 8 8 Capacities and 6 72 Carbon Monoxide 2 100 2 29 4 28 4 35 Care of Your Cassette Tape 3 31 Lc oceano eade huida a 1 39 Cassette Tape Player i pls ee eee ss 3 12 3 15 9 2 Cassette Tape Player Care tip 8 2 Cassette Tape Player Errors CD Player Theft Deterrent Feature Center Console Storage Center High Mounted Stoplamp Center Passenger Position Certification Label Shey Chains Safety Chains Tire Changing a Flat Tire Charging System Light Check Tire Pressure Light Checking Your Restraint en Chemical Paint Spotting 2 Child Restraints x Bod ok Eo d o on i p OS w om 3 13 amp 80 amp Bae koX d ox kom od Bodot m kS FT 4 m9 0m amp o Wm o4 Ao uoa 4 bod ro o oko BR 603 ok oU boa d om bomo rbit amp E 3 31 3 17 3 26 M eh i 6 41 1 28 4 30 4 35 6 54 5 24 2 66 2 TU 1 63 34 44 OGA ER Las Securing in a Rear Outside Seat Position 1 54 Securing in the Center Rear Seat Position 1 56 Secu
20. slow down until it stops Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with chains on will damage your vehicle Appearance Care Remember cleaning products can be hazardous Some are toxic Others can burst into flame if you strike match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle Some are dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space When you use anything from a container to clean your Pontiac be sure to follow the manufacturer s warnings and instructions And always open your doors or windows when you re cleaning the inside Never use these to clean your vehicle Gasoline Benzene Naphtha Carbon Tetrachloride Acetone Paint Thinner Turpentine Lacquer Thinner Nail Polish Remover They can all be hazardous some more than others and they can all damage your vehicle too Don t use any of these unless this manual says you can In many uses these will damage your vehicle Alcohol Laundry Soap Bleach Reducing Agents Cleaning the Inside of Your Pontiac Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose dirt Wipe vinyl or leather with a clean damp cloth Your Pontiac dealer has two cleaners a solvent type spot lifter and a foam type powdered cleaner They will clean normal spots and stains very well Do not use them on vinyl or leather Here are some cleaning tips Always read the instructions on the cleaner label 2 Clean up stains as soon as you can before they s
21. 13 ENGINE COOLANT RECOVERY TANK P amp 2B For detailed information refer to the page number listed or see the Index in the back of the owner s manual 9 12 1887 PONTIAC
22. For example the gage may have indicated the tank was half full but it actually took a little more or less than half the tank s capacity to fill it e The gage moves a little when you turn a corner or speed up The gage needle should move no more than 1 8 of a tank under any driving maneuver 2 77 Driver Information Center CHANGE ali Your Driver Information Center gives you important safety and maintenance facts When you turn the ignition on the entire center lights up for a few seconds Then it goes to work 2 78 Functions CHANGE OIL SOON This light will appear when the system predicts that the oil s remaining useful life 15 almost up The system predicts remaining oil life using inputs from length of drives coolant temperature engine rpm and vehicle speed It alerts you to change the oil on schedule consistent with your vehicle s driving conditions To reset your change oil soon system after an oil change turn the key to the ON position without the engine running and pump the accelerator 3 times within 5 seconds LOW WASHER FLUID This light will come on when your ignition is on and the fluid container is low CHECK TIRE PRESS This light alerts you that a tire is low or flat See Check Tire Pressure Light in the Index TRUNK AJAR This light alerts you that your trunk is not fully closed DOOR AJAR If one of your doors is left ajar a light will appear next to that door on
23. If a cassette tape or compact disc is playing the player will advance to the next selection with the up arrow and go to the previous selection with the down arrow PRESET Press this button to play a station you have programmed on the radio preset buttons When cassette tape is loaded press this button to change tape sides If vou have the trunk mounted CD player press this button to advance to the next disc in the magazine Press this button to choose AM or 2 If a cassette tape or compact disc is playing it will stop and the radio will play Understanding Radio Reception FM Stereo FM stereo will give you the best sound But FM signals will reach only about 10 to 40 miles 16 to 65 km Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals causing the sound to come and go AM The range for most stations is greater than for FM especially at night The longer range however can cause stations to interfere with each other AM can pick up noise from things like storms and power lines Try reducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever get it Tips About Your Audio System Hearing damage from loud noise is almost undetectable until it is too late Your hearing can adapt to higher volumes of sound Sound that seems normal can be loud and harmful to your hearing Take precautions by adjusting the volume control on your radio to a safe sound level before your hearing adapts to it To hel
24. N with the engine racing isn t covered by your warranty To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow or sand without damaging your transaxle see Stuck In Sand Mud Ice or Snow in the Index 2 20 AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE D This position 18 for normal driving If your vehicle has overdrive AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE D is the overdrive position If you need more power for passing and you re e Going less than 35 mph 55 km h push your accelerator pedal about halfway down Going about 35 mph 55 km h or more push the accelerator pedal all the way down You ll shift down to the next gear and have more power NOTICE If your vehicle seems to start up rather slowly or if it seems not to shift gears as you go faster something may be wrong with a transaxle system sensor If you drive very far that way your vehicle can be damaged So if this happens have your vehicle serviced right away Until then you can use SECOND 2 when you are driving less than 35 mph 55 km h and AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE D for higher speeds THIRD 3 This position 18 also used for normal driving but it offers more power and lower fuel economy than AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE D Here are some times you might choose THIRD 3 instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE D When driving on hilly winding roads e When towing a trailer so there is less shifting between gears e When going down steep hill
25. This will help keep your battery from running down Replacement Bulbs in the Index to find the type of bulb you should use For any bulb replacement procedures not explained here see your dealer Halogen Bulbs Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that can explode You can be badly hurt if you aren t careful See Jump Starting in the Index for tips on working around a battery without getting hurt Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb You or others could be injured Be sure to read and Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your vehicle follow the instructions on the bulb package for longer storage periods Also for your audio system see Theft Deterrent Feature in the Index 6 37 Headlamps 1 Open the hood and support properly 2 Remove the two holts rom the top of the headlamp assembly Carefully remove the headlamp assembly from the vehicle Be careful to avoid scratching or chipping the paint on the vehicle while removing Lift the plastic tab on the electrical connector and pull the connector 6 38 M _ 5 Rotate the lamp socket ring 1 4 turn counterclockwise Pull the lamp from the socket to remove it from the headlamp assembly Place the new lamp into the socket Hold the lamp at the hase being careful not to touch th
26. are disabled Mode 2 Remote Lock Confirmation with Exterior Lamps Only Remote Lock Confirmation When you use the chain transmitter to lock your vehicle your headlamps will flash briefly to let you know your command is received Remote Unlock confirmation when you use the key chain transmitter to unlock your vehicle or open your trunk your headlamps will flash briefly to let you know your command is received 2 49 Mode 3 Remote Lock Confirmation with Exterior Lights and Horn e Remote Lock Confirmation When you use the key chain transmitter to lock your vehicle the horn will sound briefly and your headlamps will flash briefly to let you know your command is received e Remote Unlock confirmation When you use the key chain transmitter to unlock your vehicle or open your trunk your headlamps will flash briefly to let vou know your command is received Mode 4 Remote Lock Confirmation with Exterior Lights and Horn on second LOCK press e Remote Lock Confirmation When you use the key chain transmitter to lock your vehicle your headlamps will flash briefly to Jet you know your command is received The horn will sound briefly and the headlamps will flash briefly if you press the LOCK button again within five seconds Remote Unlock Confirmation When you use the key chain transmitter to unlock your vehicle or open your trunk your headlamps will flash briefly to let you know your command is received Cont
27. every half hour or so until help comes Loading Your Vehicle TIRE LOADING INFORMATION OCCUPANTS VEHICLE WT RR TOTAL LBS KG MAX LOADING amp GVWR SAME AS VEHICLE CAPACITY WEIGHT XXX COLD TIRE TIRE SIZE SPEED PRESSURE RTG XPSIKPa FAT RR SPA IF TIRES ARE HOT ADD 4 51 28 SEE OWNER S5 MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly carry The Tire Loading Information label is on the inside of the trunk lid The label tells you the proper size speed rating and recommended inflation pressures for the tires on your vehicle It also gives you important information about the number of people that can be in your vehicle and the total weight you can carry This weight is called the vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants cargo and all nonfactory installed options 4 29 MFD BY GENERAL MOTORS CORP DATE GVWR GAWR GAWR RR THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLI CABLE U S FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY BUMPER AND THEFT PREVENTION STANDARDS EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE The other label is the Certification label found on the rear edge of the driver s door It tells you the gross weight capacity of your vehicle called the GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle all occupants fuel and cargo Never exceed the GVWR for your ve
28. nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque specification Don t try to put the wheel cover on your compact spare tire It won t fit Store the wheel cover in the trunk until you have the flat tire repaired or replaced NOTICE Wheel covers won t fit on your compact spare If you try to put a wheel cover on your compact spare vou could damage the cover or the spare Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose and even come off This could lead to an accident Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts If you have to replace them be sure to get new GM original equipment wheel nuts Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 100 b ft 140 N m Storing the Flat Tire and Tools Storing a jack a tire or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury In a sudden stop or collision loose equipment could strike someone Store all these in the proper place After you ve put the compact spare tire on your vehicle you ll need to store the flat tire in your trunk Use the fallowing procedure to secure the flat tire in the trunk 5 32 When storing a full size tire you must use the extension to help avoid wheel surface damage Use extension and protector guide located in foam holder To store a full size tire place tire valve stem facing down then remove protective guide and attach
29. such as frequent driving in stop and go traffic Most trips are through dusty areas You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top of your vehicle Ifthe vehicle is used for delivery service police taxi or other commercial application One of the reasons you should follow this schedule if you operate vour vehicle under any of these conditions is that these conditions cause engine oil to break down sooner Every 3 000 Miles 5 000 km Engine Oil and Filter Change or months whichever occurs first Every 6 000 Miles 10 000 km Tire Rotation Every 15 000 Miles 25 000 km Air Cleaner Filter Inspection if driving in dusty conditions Every 30 000 Miles 50 000 km Air Cleaner Filter Replacement Fuel Tank Cap and Lines Inspection Supercharger Oil Check or every 36 months whichever occurs first 3 8L Code 1 engine only Every 50 000 Miles 83 000 km Automatic Transaxle Service severe conditions only Every 60 000 Miles 100 000 km Engine Accessory Drive Belt Inspection Every 100 000 Miles 166 000 Km Spark Plug Wire Inspection Spark Plug Replacement Every 150 000 Miles 240 000 km Cooling System Service or every 60 months whichever occurs first These intervals only summarize maintenance services Be sure follow the complete maintenance schedule an the following pages 7 5 Maintenance Schedule Long Trip Highway Definition Follow this maintenance schedule oniy
30. 1 26 When Should 22 1225 Air Cleaner Macer Roa aperte ace e Ait Conditioning E Air Conditioning Refrigerants 6773 Alignment and Balance Tire 5 52 Aluminum Wheels Cleaning 6 61 alli eadaetus T U TO E EAE 6 27 Anti Lock Brake System Warning 2 67 4 7 Je ty v rx 4 7 Anti Theft QUERER DE eae EIE 3 26 Appearance CATA EEA E 92 521 6 55 Appearance Care Materials 6 64 Arbitration Program 8 9 PADRE each oo we ae MET a Audio Controls Steering Wheel Touch Control 3 29 Audio Equipment Adding 3 30 Audio SYANS ore TET 3 10 Auto Bown Window 2 31 Automatic Auxiliary Temp Control 3 4 D Pe IRE 7 40 Door Locks FAR rrr nnm OEC Electronic Climate Control nd aud RAIN PME aeu EA DUE UK E E 6 2 EEE E 2 19 EERIE sae KE aw BOE VUE recap 2 21 Park Mechanism Check 7 42 Back Gris AGI X Ew 3 32 wr HORE 8 28 Starting 2 22 2 2 DTE te EE RITU
31. 5 3 Replacement Remote Keyless os sux Tr NES 2 10 Resynchronization Remote Keyless Entry 2 11 PY REDE Emm trn 5 3 5 5 ra vede ce a pato Seat X ra 1 42 BBB Auto Lite 8 9 Better Business Bureau Mediation 2 8 9 a ieee ease to HERES 6 36 ANHEE rere ETE 4 7 RT S da ew 6 13 Master Cylinder SIT repeat 6 33 en C REL EDISON E 2 24 Pedal Travel EHE TENIS AM o s saa Replacing System il Sue 6 36 System Warning 2 66 4 35 Transaxle Shift Interlock 2 28 Transaxle Shift Interlock Check 7241 oc pee SERRE eov eie 6 35 252522504252 TRA place ei 4 6 Braking in Emergencies 4 11 Bienk In New Vehicle ices saneenes sas socal 2 15 ae Wala A OO EEA wie E FOETA 2 28 7 41 Built in Child Restraints 1 38 Adjusting the Harness Height 1 40 Removing a Child from 1 50 decanmme reni mirrors 1 44 BAGUE p e x s EE E e d
32. 6 32 6 33 6 36 6 37 6 37 6 44 6 46 Doing Your Own Service Work What Kind of Fuel to Use Using Fuel in Foreign Countries Where to Put the Fuel and Filling the Tank Checking Things Under the Hood Checking Your Engine Oil Automatic Transaxle Fluid Engine Coolant Where to Fill the Windshield Washer Fluid Important Brake Information Information on Your Vehicle s Battery Tips on Vehicle Storage Bulb Replacement Procedures Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement How and When to Check Tire Inflation When it is Time to Buy New Tires Wheel Alignment Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle Care of the Safety Belts and Built in Child Restraint Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle How to Clean Aluminum Wheels Underbody Maintenance Recommended Appearance Care Materials Your Vehicle Identification Number VIN The Electrical System Fuses and Circuit Breakers Replacement Bulb Types for Your Vehicle Capacities and Specifications Air Conditioning Specifications Normal Replacement Parts 6 1 Service Your Pontiac dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to be happy with it We hope you ll go to your dealer for all your service needs You ll get genuine GM parts and GM trained and supported service people We hope you ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM Genuine GM parts have one of these marks Doing Your Own Service Work If you want to do some of your own service work you ll want to get the proper Pontiac Ser
33. 8 12 Hr gine Soon Light oi aise tienes scene nm emen Manuals Ordering 8 12 Parts Identification 6 65 Publications Ordering AA orion 8 12 Work Doing Your 6 2 Service and Appearance Care 6 1 Service and Owner Publications 8 12 Service 8 8 12 Servicing Your Air Bag Equipped Pontiac 1 27 sheet Metal Damape 6 62 SAE OVE e wie eae ea poe eaten 2 26 Shift Lock Releuse 2 2 Shifting K toninti e e errorem c 19 Into Park P oo 2 25 DODODEMES 2 28 POPCORN es Xv e C REUS 2 23 Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster 1 16 Sienaling TU i penoa krasa da antr tees caw 2 32 4 15 sound Equipment Adding 3 30 Spas IW SOMONE 5 34 Specifications and 6 72 apecifications Engine 6 72 6 73 speech Impaired Customer Assistance 8 5 SDDOHOTDEl D cicer E ERE E EVERY 2 63 eR pla rs ae E 1 22 Stgins Cleaning 2 re cen Se ee e a ERE cesses prae Eam ird 7 4 Starting Your Engine 22222 ae 2 10 steam Lu ira ad pure pra ATI YU ETAT ETE 2 13 OCDE s res
34. 8 2 Pontiac Cares Services 8 8 Pontiac Courtesy Transportation 5 3 What Makes up Pontiac Cares 8 9 BBB Autoline Information 5 1 Customer Satisfaction Procedure 8 10 Warranty Information 8 4 Customer Assistance Information 5 10 Reporting Safety Defects to the United States 8 5 Address for Writing to Pontiac 8 11 Reporting Safety Defects to Canada 8 5 Assistance for Text Telephone TTY Users 8 11 Reporting Safcty Defects to General Motors 8 6 Pontiac Roadside Assistance 8 Ordering Service Publications in Canada B 6 Phone Number for Roadside Assistance 8 12 How to Order Service Publications 8 8 Canadian Roadside Assistance 8 13 Order Form for Service Publications Pontiac Cares y PONTIAC With PONTIAC CARES you are never more than phone call away from having your concern taken care of The PONTIAC CARES philosophy and elements are designed to make you realize that Pontiac recognizes you as valuable customer appreciales your purchase decision and is dedicated to taking care of the most important person YOU PONTIAC CARES ts A valuable feature that comes with every Pontiac a feature that offers a multitude of benefits that can give you safety security comfort and convenience What makes up Pontiac Cares A year 36 000 mile 60 000 km Bumper to Bumper Warranty e Customer Assistance Roadside Assistance Courtesy Transportation All of these elements combine to make your driving experience an enjoya
35. EROR DA 4 11 Windows race CE eee Pregnancy Use of Safety Bid e eo eee 1 21 Probi ms onte Road sere nnn 2 1 Publications Service and Owner 8 12 Purse or Litter Bag 2 2 61 Radiator REESE ee CERE VIEN 5 20 Radiator Pressure PM cee nee es 6 29 ede tas e ae Radios VEsuu us en Rain Driving Me NM age 4 17 Rear Outside Seat Position nm 1 30 Safety Belt Comfort Guides cis 4d Sent 1729 eoa CER 3 H Window Defogger Ve acce P ER AUR EN ur 3 9 SS i Rear Armrest 5 duces YAT 2 57 Safety Belt 1 63 Rear Assist Handle Reading Lamps 2 43 ois aia singel ewe Dasa ak c reu car dedi Rearview Mirror Electrochromic Day Night 2 53 Adulls aol perenne ceras 1 14 Rearview Mirror Inside Day Night 2 53 IAN Mu Ra uc s rd ET 2 4 6 58 Reclining Front Seatbacks Us Center Passenger Position 1 28 Recovery Tank 5 16 TS rover Exe a did M 1 36 Refrigerants Air Co
36. Front Parking Turn Signal 3357 Hendl tupms uoa cu a ae CEA ED QO Stop Tail Turn 5 3057 Front Rear Side Marker ries le 194 Capacities and Specifications Please refer to Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index for more information Automatic Transaxle with Overdrive Pan Removal and Replacement 7 4 quarts 7 0 L After Complete Overhaul 10 quarts 9 5 L When draining replacing converter or auxiliary cooler more fluid be needed Cooling System Including Reservoir 3100 Code 11 0 quarts 10 42 L S800 Code 10 2 quarts 9 63 L 3800 Supercharged Code 1 10 2 quarts 9 63 1 Refrigerant R 1344 Air Conditioning 2 1 9 pounds 0 85 kg 6 72 Engine Crankcase Oil Change with Filter Change 3100 Code M 2s uae 4 5 quarts 4 3 L 3800 Code 4 5 quarts 4 3 L 3800 Supercharged Code 1 5 quarts 4 7 L Fuel Tank 18 0 gallons 68 0 L See Afr Conditioning Refrigerants later in this section 3100 Code M Engine Specifications INDE curuli A oe V6 Displacement 191 CID 3 1L L82 awe aes 1 2 3 4 5 6 Thermostat Temperature 95 F 91 PEEPS BIRT Lure Xd Ka be a EEE Ea UN ee d 160 3800 Code K Engine Specifications IE YF A
37. Fuel Symbol 2 83 The HUD will display the Check Gage when the following are lit on the instrument panel Oil warning Symbol Coolant Temperature Symbol Charging System Symbol When you sit straight in your seat the HUD image will appear straight ahead near the front bumper When the igmtion key is turned to RUN the HUD image will come on Then the Head Up Display will operate normally 2 84 NOTICE Although the HUD image appears to be near the front of the vehicle do not use it as a parking aid The HUD was not designed for that purpose If you try to use it that way such as in parking lot vou may misjudge distance and run into something When the HUD is on the speedometer reading will be displayed continually The current radio station or CD track number will only be displayed for three seconds after the radio or CD track status changes This will happen whenever one of the radio controls is pressed either on the radio itself or on the optional steering wheel controls To adjust HUD so you can see it properly Start your engine and turn the DIM dial to the desired HUD image brightness 2 Adjust your seat if necessary to a comfortable position 3 Press the top of the UP DN switch until the HUD image stops moving Then press the bottom of the switch until the image is as low as possible but in full view 4 Turn thc DIM dial down until the HUD image is no brighter t
38. I Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN 2 Turn the radio off 3 Press the 1 and 4 buttons together Hold them down until SEC shows on the display 4 Press MIN and 000 will appear on the display 5 Press MIN again to make the last two digits agree with your code 6 Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree with your code 7 Press AM FM after you have confirmed that the code matches the secret code you have written down The display will show indicating that the radio is no longer secured If the code entered 15 incorrect SEC will appear on the display The radio will remain secured until the correct code is entered When battery power 18 removed and later applied to a secured radio the radio won t turn on and LOC will appear on the display To unlock a secured radio see Unlocking the Theft Deterrent Feature After a Power Loss earlier in this section Steering Wheel Controls If Equipped If your vehicle has this feature you can control certain radio functions using the buttons on your steering wheel VOLUME Press the up or down arrow to increase or decrease volume PLAY Press this button to play a cassette tape or compact disc when the radio is playing MUTE Press this button to silence the system Press it again or any other radio button to turn on the sound SEEK Press the up arrow to tune to the next radio station and the down arrow to tune to the previous radio station
39. Light in the Index When this warning light is on the system will not limit wheel spin Adjust your driving accordingly To limit wheel spin especially in slippery road conditions you should always leave the Trac System on But you can turn the system off if you ever need to You should turn the system off if your vehicle ever gets stuck in sand mud ice or snow See Rocking Your Vehicle in the Index 4 10 To turn the system on or off press the TRAC button on the on the far right end of the Driver Information Center or the optional Trip Computer When you turn the system off the Trac System warning light will come on and stay on If the Trac System is limiting wheel spin when you press the button to turn the system off the warning light will come on but the system won t turn off right away It will wait until there s no longer a current need to limit wheel spin You can turn the system hack on at any time by pressing the button again The Trac System warning light should go off Braking Emergencies With anti lock vou can steer and brake at the same time many emergencies steering can help you more than even the very best braking Steering Power Steering If you lose power steering assist because the engine stops or the system is not functioning you can steer but it will take much more effort Variahle Effort Steering Option This steering system provides lighter steering eff
40. Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer When you tow a trailer your vehicle may need a different turn signal flasher and or extra wiring Check with your Pontiac dealer The green arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane change Properly hooked up the trailer lamps will also flash telling other drivers you re about to turn change lanes or stop When towing a trailer the green arrows on your instrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burned out Thus you may think drivers behind you are seeing your signal when they are noL It s important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still working Your vehicle has bulb warning lights When you plug a trailer lighting system into your vehicle s lighting system its bulb warning lights may not let vou know if one of your lamps goes out So when you have a trailer lighting system plugged in be sure to check your vehicle and trailer lamps from time to time to be sure they re all working Once you disconnect the trailer lamps the bulb warning lights again can tell you if one of your vehicle lamps is out Driving On Grades Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start down a long or steep downgrade If you don t shift down you might have to use your brakes so much that they would get hot and no longer work well On long uphill grade shift down and reduce your speed to around 45 mph 7
41. Woke oe Then replace the pressure cap At any time during this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the filler neck reinstall the pressure cap Be sure the arrows on the pressure cap line up like this Check th coolant in the recovery tank The level in the coolant recovery tank should be at the HOT mark when the engine is hot or at the COLD mark when the engine is cold If a Tire Goes Flat Its unusual for a tire to blow out while you re driving especially if you maintain your tires properly If air goes out of a tire it s much more likely to leak out slowly But if you should ever have a blowout here are few tips about what to expect and what to do If a front tire fails the flat tire will create a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly Steer to maintain lane position and then gently brake to a stop well out of the traffic lane rear blowout particularly on a curve acts much like skid and may require the same correction you d use ina skid In any rear blowout remove your foot from the accelerator pedal Get the vehicle under control by steering the way you want the vehicle to go It may be very bumpy and noisy but you can still steer Gently brake to a stop well off the road if possible If a tire goes flat the next part shows how to use your jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely 5 23 Cha
42. You be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts hot enough Don t spill coolant on a hot engine When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank at the COLD mark start your vehicle If the overheat warning continues there s one more thing you can try You can add the proper coolant mix directly to the radiator but he sure the cooling system is cool before you do it 5team scalding liquids from a hot cooling system can blow out and burn you badly They under pressure and if vou turn the radiator pressure cap even a little they can come out at high speed Never turn the cap when the cooling system including the radiator pressure cap is hot Wait for the cooling system and radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap 5 5 5 19 How to Add Coolant to the Radiator hose is no longer hot Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise until it first staps Don t press down while turning the pressure cap NOTICE If you hear a hiss wait for that ta stop hiss means there is still some pressure left Your engine has specific radiator fill procedure Failure to follow this procedure could cause your engine to overheat and be severely damaged 2 Then keep turning the pressure cap but now push down as you tum it Remove the pressur
43. Your Vehicle Each key chain transmitter is coded to prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle If a transmitter is lost or stolen a replacement be purchased through your dealer Remember to bring any remaining transmitters with you when you go to your dealer When the dealer matches the replacement transmitter to your vehicle any remaining transmitters must also be matched Once your dealer has coded the new transmitter the lost transmitter will not unlock your vehicle Each vehicle can have only four transmitters matched to it Battery Replacement Under normal use the battery in your remote keyless entry transmitter should last about two years You can tell the battery is weak if the transnutler won t work at the normal range in any location If you have to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works it s probably time to change the battery 2 10 To replace your battery 1 Insert a flat object like a dime into the slot on the side of the transmitter and twist to separate the halves 2 Gently pry the battery out of the transmitter Do not use metal flanges to pop out the battery 3 Put the new battery into the transmitter as shown on the transmitter use a type CR2032 battery 4 Reassemble the transmitter Make sure the halves are snapped together tightly so water will not get in 5 Check the transmitter operation If needed follow the instructions on resynchromizing your remo
44. acceptable range push the wiser Howie Cole dipstick back in all the way When the correct fluid level is obtained push the dipstick back in all the way 6 25 Engine Coolant The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with new DEX COQOL engine coolant This coolant is designed to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150 000 miles 240 000 km whichever occurs first The following explains your cooling system and how to add coolant when it is low If you have a prablem with engine overheating or if you need to add coolant to your radiator see Engine Overheating in the Index A 50 50 mixture of water and the proper coolant for your Pontiac will e Give freezing protection down to 34 F 37 C Give boiling protection up to 265 F 129 C Protect against rust and corrosion Help keep the proper engine temperature 6 26 Let the warning lights and gages work as they should NOTICE When adding coolant it is important that you use only DEX COOL silicate free coolant W silicated coolant is added to the system premature engine heater core or radiator corrosion may result In addition the engine coolant will require change sooner at 30 000 miles 50 000 km or 24 months whichever occurs first What to Use Use a mixture of one half clean water preferably distilled and one half DEX COQOL coolant which won t damage aluminum parts If you use this mixture you don t ne
45. ba HELM INCORPORATED P O Bow 07130 Detroit 26207 For purchases outsitte LI E A please write to this above address far quatatian i na n l x add 855 sales _ VISA ie x pui 10 LITT Holm inc USA lunds only do send cash MasterCard ATTENTION CUBTOMER S STREET ADURHESS NO FO BOX NUMBERS Expiration m Check hera if your billing ackiress ti STATE zw Date movyr arent from your shipping DAYTIME TELEPHONE AREA CODE CUSTOMER SURE GM PON DRDS7 ferias fo change without notice and without incusrins Note io Canadian Customers All listed press are quoted in US funds Canadian residents obligation A Bow ample ime tor delivery are bo make checks payable US funds cover Canadian postage 11 50 pius the 1 5 ander processing 0 NOTES 8 14 Y Section 9 Index Power 2 97 2 59 Bir BER ERO Tm E How Does it Restrain 1 26 it Witte usuras reus sry 24 LOU eS LU RUNS MIN RUNS 1 24 Readiness Light puse di aora 1 23 2 65 Lu DOR EASIER UR a HS 1 27 What Makes it 1 25 What Will You See After it Inflates
46. belt comfort for children who have outgrown child restraints and for small adults When installed on a shoulder belt the comfort guide pulls the belt away from the neck and head There is one guide for each outside passenger position in the rear seat To provide added safety helt comfort for children who have outgrown child restraints and for smaller adults the comfort guides may be installed on the shoulder belts Here s how to install a camfort guide and use the safety belt 1 Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge of the seatback and the interior body to remove the guide from its storage clip 2 Slide guide under and past the belt The elastic 3 Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat cord must be under the belt Then place the guide The elastic cord must be under the belt and the over the belt and insert the two edges of the belt into guide on top the slots of the guide 4 Buckle position and release the safety belt as described in Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions earlier in this section Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder To remove and store the comfort guides squeeze the belt edges together so that you can take them out from the guides Pull the guide upward to expose its storage clip and then slide the guide onto the clip Rotate the guide and clip inward and in between the seatback and the interior body leaving only the loop of elastic cord exposed C
47. brake pedal lightly until your brakes work normally Hydroplaning Hydroplaning is dangerous So much water can build up under your tires that they can actually ride on the water This can happen if the road 1s wet enough and you re going fast enough When your vehicle is hydroplaning it has little or no contact with the road Hydroplaning doesn t happen often But it can if your tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or more is low It can happen if a lot of water is standing on the road If you can see reflections from trees telephone poles or other vehicles and raindrops dimple the water s surface there could be hydroplaning Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds There just isn t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning The hest advice is to slow down when it is raining Driving Through Deep Standing Water If you drive too quickly through deep puddles or standing water water can come in through your engine s air intake and badly damage your engine Never drive through water that is slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle If you can t avoid deep puddles or standing water drive through them very slowly Some Other Rainy Weather Tips Besides slowing down allow some extra following distance And be especially careful when you pass another vehicle Allow yourself more clear room ahead and be prepared to have your view restricted by road spray Have good tir
48. break the key or the ignition switch If none of this works then your vehicle needs service 2 16 use NEUTRAL N only NOTICE Don t try to shift to PARK P if your Pontiac is moving If vou do you could damage the transaxle Shift to PARK P only when your vehicle is stopped E Without pushing the accelerator pedal turn your ignition key to START When the engine starts let go of the key The idle speed will go down as your engine gets warm NOTICE Your engine is designed to work with the electronics in your vehicle If vou add electrical parts or accessories vou could change the way the engine operates Before adding electrical equipment check with your dealer If vou don t your engine might not perform properly If you ever have to have your vehicle tawed see the part of this manual that tells how to do it without damaging your vehicle See Towing Your Vehicle in the Index Holding your key in START for longer than 15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to be drained much sooner And the excessive heat can damage your starter motor 2 If it doesn t start right away hold your key in START for about three to five seconds at a time until your engine starts Wait about 15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining your battery 3 If your engine still won t start or starts but then stops it could be flooded with too much gasoline Try pushing your acc
49. but also helps the environment All recommended maintenance procedures are important Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect the quality of the air we breathe Improper fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions from your vehicle To help protect our environment and to keep your vehicle in good condition please maintain your vehicle properly How This Section is Organized The remainder of this section is divided into five parts Part A Scheduled Maintenance Services shows what to have done and how often Some of these services can be complex so unless you are technically qualified and have the necessary equipment you should let your dealer s service department or another qualified service center do these johs Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be dangerous In trying to do some jobs you can be seriously injured Do your own maintenance work only if you have the required know how and the proper tools and equipment for the job If you have any doubt have a qualified technician do the work If you are skilled enough to do some work on your vehicle you will probably want to get the service information GM publishes See Service and Owner Publications in the Index Part B Owner Checks and Services tells you what should be checked and when It also explains what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition Part C Periodic Maint
50. by looking for the Starburst symbol This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute Do not use any oil which does not carry this Starburst symbol If you change your own oil sure you use oil that has the Starburst symbol on the front of the oil container If you have your oil changed you be sure the oil put into your engine is American Petroleum Institute certified for gasoline engines You should also use the proper viscosity oil for your vehicle as shown in the following chart eens shown in the chart unless you have the 3800 engine MEETING IMS ONE T SAE 5W 30 is best for your vehicle However you can FOR BEST FUEL ECONOMY AMD COLD STARTING SELECT THE LOWEST use SAE LOW 30 if it s going to be 18 C or SAE WISCOSITY GRADE ML FOR THE EXPECTED TEMPERATURE RANGE d above These numbers on an ail container show its viscosity thickness Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W 50 HOT DO HOT USE SAE 20 50 OTHER GRADE OIL RECOMMENDED 3100 Engine 6 16 As shown in the chart if you have the 3800 engine SAE MENNMENND SAE VISCOSITY OES 10W 30 is best for your vehicle However you can use FOR BEST FUEL ECONOMY COLD STARTING SELECT THE LOWEST SAE 5W 30 if it s going to be colder than 60 F 16 C SAF WIS n m h MZ 5 amp J 1
51. doors using your key chain transmitter if equipped Lock the doors using the power door lock switch When any door is opened Exit Lighting is canceled The interiar lamps will stay on while any door is opened and will slowly fade out when all the doors are closed The interior lamps stay on for up to 25 seconds after all the doors have been closed if they have not been locked See Delayed Illumination earlier in this section To turn the Exit Lighting feature off or on see Locks and Lighting Choices in the Index 2 42 Battery Saver Your vehicle has a feature to help prevent you from draining the battery in case you accidentally leave the interior trunk or underhood lamps If you leave any of these lamps on while the ignition is in LOCK or OFF position they will automatically turn off after 10 minutes The lamps won t come back on again until you do one of the following e Turn the ignition to the RUN or ACCESSORY position Turn the interior lamp dial all the way to the right then back slightly to the left Open or close and reopen a door that is closed Note that if your vehicle has less than 15 miles 25 km on the odometer the battery saver will turn off the lamps after only three minutes Retained Accessory Power With retained accessory power your power windows audio system and sunroof will continue to work up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is turned to the OFF position and none of the d
52. fogging the inside of your windows Keep the air path under the front seats clear of objects This helps air to circulate throughout your vehicle Rear Window Defogger Your comfort control system has a button to operate your rear window defogger The electronic comfort control system has a button marked REAR The system with automatic temperature control has a button marked R DEF The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to remove fog from the rear window Press the button to turn the rear defogger on It will turn itself off after about ten minutes If you turn it on again the rear defogger will only run lor about five minutes before turning off You can also turn it off pressing the button again Do not attach anything like a temporary vehicle license or decal across the defogger grid NOTICE Don t use a razor blade or anything else sharp on the inside of the rear window If you do you could cut or damage the warming grid and the repairs wouldn t be covered by your warranty Audio Systems AM FM Stereo LI b Ld r Your Delco audio system has been designed to operate easily and give years of listening pleasure You will get the most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself with it first Find out what your Delco system can do and how to operate all its controls to he sure you re getting the most out of the advanced engineering that went into it Setting
53. for details We have quick easy access to telephone numbers of the fallowing additional services depending on your needs Hotels Glass replacement Rental vehicle or taxis Police fire department or hospitals In many instances mechanical failures are covered under Pontiac s comprehensive warranty However when other services are utilized our advisors will explain any payment obligations you might incur For prompt and efficient assistance when calling please provide the following information to give the advisor Location of vehicle Telephone number of your location Vehicle model year and color Mileage of vehicle Vehicle Identification Number WIN Vehicle license plate number Pontiac reserves the right to limit services or reimbursement to an owner or driver when in Pontiac s judgement the claims become excessive in frequency or tvpe of occurrence While we hope that you never have the occasion to use our service it is added security while traveling for you and your family Remember we re only a phone call away Pontiac Roadside Assistance 1 800 ROADSIDE or 1 800 762 3743 8 7 Canadian Roadside Assistance Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive Roadside Assistance program accessible from anywhere in Canada or the United States Please refer to the separate brochure provided by the dealer or call 1 800 268 6800 for emergency services Pontiac Courtesy Transportation
54. half to the defroster and side window vents Sp DEFROST This setting directs most of the air through the defroster vent Some of the air goes to the floor ducts and the side window vent The air conditioning compressor will run automatically in this setting unless the outside temperature is below 38 F 3 3 C Air Conditioning Compressor Button Press the A C button to operate the air conditioning compressor The indicator light above the button will glow when the button is pressed You don t have to press the button to run the compressor in MAX or DEFROST because it will already be running in these modes Air Conditioning On very hot days open the windows long enough to let hot inside air escape This reduces the time for the vehicle to cool down For quick cool down on very hot days use MAX with the temperature knob all the way in the blue area If this setting is used for long periods of time the air in your vehicle may become too dry For normal cooling on hot days use UPPER with the temperature knob in the blue area and the A C button pushed in The system will bring in outside air and cool it On cool but sunny days the sun may warm your upper body hut your lower body may not be warm enough You can use BI LEVEL with the temperature knob in the middle and the A C button pushed in The system will bring in outside air and direct it to your upper body while sending slightly warmed air to your lower body You
55. in So be sure you have extra keys 2 3 Door Locks Unlocked doors can be dangerous Passengers especially children can easily open the doors and fall out When a door is locked the inside handle won t open it Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked door when you slow down or stop vour vehicle This may not be so obvious You increase the chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in crash if the doors aren t locked Wear safety belts properly lock your doors and you will be far better off whenever you drive your vehicle There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle Front Door To unlock either front door from outside the vehicle with your key insert it fully into the door key cylinder and turn it toward the front You can lock cither front door from outside the vehicle with your key by inserting it fully into the rear door key cylinder and turning it toward the rear unlock either front door from inside the vehicle rotate the lock lever back To lock either front door from inside the vehicle slide the lock lever forward Rear Door s To unlock either rear door from inside the vehicle rotate the lock lever back To lock either rear door from inside the vehicle slide the lock lever forward Power Door Lacks To unlock all doors from inside the vehicle press the front of the power door lock switch on either front door If your vehicle is equipped with Content T
56. in the center seat position the one that has only lap belt 1 61 1 62 Never do this Here a child is sitting in a seat that has lap shoulder belt but the shoulder part is behind the child If the child wears the belt in this way in a crash the child might slide under the belt The belt s force would then be applied right on the child s abdomen That could cause serious or fatal injuries Wherever the child sits the lap portion of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the child s thighs This applies belt force to the child s pelvic banes in a crash Safety Belt Extender If the vehicle s safety belt will fasten around you you should use it But if a safety belt isn t long enough to fasten your dealer will order you an extender It s free When you go in to order it take the heaviest coat you will wear so the extender will be long enough for you The extender will be just for you and just for the seat in your vehicle that you choose Don t let someone else use it and use it only for the seat it is made to fit To wear it just attach it to the regular safety belt Checking Your Restraint Systems Now and then make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your belts buckles latch plates retractors and anchorages are working properly If your vehicle has a built in child restraint also periodically make sure the harness straps latch plates buckle clip re
57. increase occupant safety To lock All doors will lock when you press the power door lock switch or when you lock the vehicle using the Remote Lock Control key chain transmitter e To unlock doors will unlock when you press the power door lock switch again or when you press UNLOCK on the key chain transmitter Mode 2 Automatic Locking Only Automatic Door Unlocking Off Automatic Door Locking Shift out of PARK P with the ignition on and the driver s door closed all doors will lock automatically Mode 3 Automatic Unlocking With Ignition e Automatic Door Unlocking Turn off the ignition with the Transaxle in PARK P and all doors will unlock automatically Automatic Door Locking Shift out of PARK P with the ignition on and the driver s door closed and all doors will unlock automatically Mode 4 Automatic Unlocking and Locking With Transaxle in PARK P Automatic Door Unlocking Shift into PARK P with the ignition on and all doors will unlock automatically Automatic Door Locking Shift out of PARK P with the ignition on and the driver s door closed and all doors will lock automatically 2 47 Lockout Deterrent Last Door Closed Locking Your vehicle comes with this feature set in Mode 2 This means that If you leave your keys m the ignition and get out of the driver s door you won t be able to lock the doors with the power door lacks and To change the factory setting do th
58. into their stored positions when you re not using them Playing a Cassette Tape Your tape player is built to work hest with tapes that are 30 to 45 minutes long on each side Tapes longer than that are so thin they may not work well in this player While the tape 15 playing use the VOL FADE BAL BASS and TREB controls just as you do for the radio The display will show an arrow to show which side af the tape is playing When the down indicator arrow is lit selections listed on the bottom side of the cassette are playing When the up arrow is lit selections listed on the top side of the cassette are playing The tape player automatically begins playing the other side when it reaches the end of the tape If E and a number appear on the radio display the tape won t play because of an error E10 The tape is tight and the player can t turn the tape hubs Remove the tape Hold the tape with the open end down and try to turn the right hub counterclockwise with a pencil Turn the tape over and repeat If the hubs do not turn easily your tape may be damaged and should not be used in the player Try a new tape to make sure your player is working properly e Ell The tape is broken Try a new tape 3 13 If any error occurs repeatedly or if error can t be corrected please contact your dealer If your radio displays an error number write it down and provide it to your dealer when reporting the problem PREV 1 Press
59. it from this position To install your garage door opener follow these instructions 2 56 Open the compartment by pressing the latch forward Remove the piece of self sticking Velcro 2 Peel the protective backing from the Velcro and press it firmly to the back of your garage door opener 3 Be sure that the button on your garage door opener is centered above the area with raised lines on the compartment door Make sure the button is facing down and press the opener firmly into place 4 Once the opener is installed remove the peg B from the compartment nstall the peg onto the feature A on the door that is aligned with your garage door opener button 5 Add one peg at a time until your garage door opener operates with the compartment door closed when you press the button SUNGLASSES STORAGE COMPARTMENT Your sunglasses storage compartment is the second compartment from the back on the overhead console To open the sunglasses storage compartment press the release latch forward and pull the compartment down to the full open position ACCESSORY POWER OUTLET In front of your reading lights in small black door Push up on the bottom edge of this door ta expose your accessory power outlet and a small storage compartment Trunk Access Panel If Equipped 4 red If your Grand Prix has rear seat armrests you will also have a trunk access panel To use the trunk access panel pull your re
60. km C Inspect engine accessory drive belt O Change engine oil and filter or every An Emission Control Service 12 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information C Inspect fuel tank cap and lines for damage SOROR or leaks Inspect fuel cap gasket for damage Replace parts as needed An Emission Control Service See footnote C Inspect camshaft timing belt An Emission Control Service See footnote Replace air cleaner filter An Emission Control Service ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY 4 a M Long Trip Highway Maintenance Schedule 75 000 Miles 125 000 km 82 500 Miles 137 500 km C Change engine oil and filter or every 1 Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first 12 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service An Emission Control Service Inspect camshaft timing belt Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and An Emission Control Service Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and See footnote Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote ACTUAL MILEAGE _ SERVICED BY ACTUAL M
61. km of purchase whichever occurs first 6 63 Materials Chart 99454 23mx25in Polishing Cloth Wax Treated Exterior Polish a Tar and Road Oil Remover Also removes old waxes and polishes Chrome Cleaner and Polis White Sidewall Tire Cleaner 2 gal 3 785 L Magic Mirror Cleaner Polish E Exterior cleaner and palish 1050214 32 oz 0 946 1 Vinyl and Leather Cleaner Spot and stain removal Cleans grease rime and smoke Fm em ei 1052918 0 2371 Armor All Protector Protects leather and rubber 1052925 16 0 473 L Multi Purpose Powdered Cleaner Cleans vinyl cloth tires and mats 1052029 16 oz 0 473 L Wheel Cleaner Spray on wheel cleaner 1052930 8 oz 0 237 L Capture Dry Spot Remover Attracts and absorbs soils 12345002 160 0 4731 Armor All Cleaner Cleans vinyl leather and rubber 12345725 0 354 L Silicone Tire Shine Shines tires See your General Motors Parts Department for these products Not recommended for pigskin suede leather See Fluids and Lubricants in the Index Not recommended for use on instrument panel vinyl 6 64 Vehicle Identification Number VIN SAMPLE EAU PLANT 1997 s m exe ENGINE CODE This is the legal identifi
62. latch plate and pulling it along the belt Put the restraint on the seat Follow the instructions for the child restraint Secure the child in the child restraint as the instructions say 1 56 4 Run the vehicle s safety belt through or around the 6 To tighten the belt pull its free end while you push restraint The child restraint instructions will show down on the child restraint you how 7 Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure If it isn t secure the restraint in a different place in the vehicle and contact the child restraint maker for their advice about how to attach the child restraint properly To remove the child restraint just unbuckle the vehicle s safety belt It will be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger 5 Buckle the belt Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to securing a Child Restraint the Right You ll be using the lap shoulder belt See the earlier Front Seat Position about the top strap if the child restraint has one 1 Because your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag always move the seat as far back as it will go E before securing forward facing child restraint See in the Index Put the restraint on the seat Follow the instructions for the child restraint 3 Secure the child in the child restraint
63. lock the doors Mode 3 Exit Lighting Only The interior lamps will come on whenever you remove the key from the ignition and stay on for about 25 seconds or until you lock ihe doors Mode 4 Both On This combines modes 2 and 3 2 46 Automatic Door Locks Unlocked doors can be dangerous Passengers especially children can easily fall out When a door is locked the inside handle won t open it Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked door when you slow down or stop your vehicle This may not be so obvious You increase the chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash if the doors aren t locked Wear safety belts properly lock your doors and you will be far better off whenever you drive your vehicle Your vehicle comes with this feature set in Mode 3 This means that All doors will automatically lock when you shift out of PARK P and e Al doors will automatically unlock when the ignition is turned OFF To change the factory setting while in the programming mode do the following 1 Press LOCK on the power lock switch 2 Count the number of chimes you hear The number of chimes tells you which mode your vehicle 15 set You change the mode by pressing LOCK again 3 Repeat step 2 until you hear the number of chimes that matches the mode you want Mode 1 Off Automatic door locking and unlocking are disabled You will always need to lock your door manually while driving to
64. model General Motors vehicles The toll free telephone number for ordering information in Canada is 1 800 668 5539 8 11 1997 PONTIAC SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDERING INFORMATION The following publications covering the operation and servicing of your vehicle can be purchased by filling out the Service Publication Order Form in this book and mailing it in with your check money order or credit card information to Helm TIROLORREAT anes below CURRENT PUBLICATIONS FOR 1997 PONTIAC SERVICE MANUALS Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information on engines transmission axle suspension brakes electrical steering body etc RETAIL SELL PRICE 90 00 TRANSMISSION TRANSAXLE TRANSFER CASE UNIT REPAIR MANUAL This manual provides information on unit repair service procedures adjustments and specifications for the 1997 GM transmissions transaxles and transfer cases RETAIL SELL PRICE 40 00 SERVICE BULLETINS Service Bulletins give technical service information needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle PLEASE COMPLETE THE ORDER FORM SHOWN ON THE FOLLOWING PAGE AND MAIL TO Helm Incorporated Box 07130 Detroit MI 48207 OWNER S INFORMATION Owner publications are written directly for Owners and intended to provide basic operational information about the vehicle The owner s manual w
65. notice this temperature difference more at some times than others Heating On cold days use FLOOR with the temperature knob all the way in the red area The system will bring in outside air heat it and send it to the floor ducts If your vehicle has an engine coolant heater you can use it to help your system provide warm air faster when it s cold outside 18 C or lower An engine coolant heater warms the coolant your engine and heating system use to provide heat 5ee Engine Coolant Heater in the Index Ventilation For mild outside temperatures when little heating or cooling is needed use UPPER with the A C button off to direct outside air through your vehicle Your vehicle also has the flow through ventilation system described later in this section Defogging and Defrosting Your system has two settings for clearing the front and side windows To defrost the windows quickly use DEFROST with the temperature knob all the way in the red area To warm passengers while keeping the windows clean use DEFOG 3 4 Air Conditioning with Automatic and Auxiliary Temperature Control If Equipped es DIM LIIS Ian With this system you set a desired cabin temperature You can then either let the system automatically control airflow direction and amount to maintain the desired cabin temperature or you can manually adjust it The system works best if you keep your windows closed while us
66. of that first If you don t explosive gas could he present Before you connect the cables here are some basic things you should know Positive will go to positive and negative will go to negative or a metal engine part Don t connect positive to negative or you ll get a short that would damage the battery and maybe other parts too Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you Don t get it on you If you accidentally get it in your eyes or on your skin flush the place with water and get medical help immediately Z CAUTION 5 Check that the jumper cahles don t have loose or missing insulation If they do you could get a shock The vehicles could be damaged too Fans or other moving engine parts can injure vou badly Keep your hands away from moving parts once the engines are running un un 7 Don t let the other end touch metal Connect it to the positive 4 terminal of the good battery Use a remote positive terminal if the vehicle has one 8 Now connect the black negative cable to the good battery s negative terminal Don t let the other end touch anything until the next step The other end of the negative cable doesn t go to the dead battery 6 Connect the red positive cable to the positive terminal of the vehicle with the dead battery Use remote positive terminal if the vehicle has one It goes to a heavy unpainted metal part on
67. of the wheel wrench pry along the edge of the cover until it comes olf Be careful the edges may be sharp Don t try to remove the cover with your bare hands If your vehicle has wheel nut caps remove them using ihe wheel wrench Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the spare Tire 1 Using the wheel wrench loosen all the wheel nuts Don t remove them vet Turn the jack handle clockwise to raise the jack lift head a few inches FRONT OF VEHICLE EE feat rea REAR EDGE OF FRONT WHEEL OPENING For jacking at the vehicle s front location put jack lift head about 6 inches 15 cm from the rear edge of the front wheel opening or in between the two bolts as shown FRONT OF VEHICLE EDGE OF REAR WHEEL OPENING For jacking at the vehicle s rear location put jack lift head about 5 5 inches 14 cm from the front edge of rear wheel opening or just behind off set as shown Put the compact spare tir near you Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is dangerous If the vehicle slips off the jack you could be badly injured or killed Never get under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack Z CAUTION Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly positioned can damage the vehicle and even make the vehicle fall To help avoid personal injury and vehicle damage be sure to fit the jack lift head into the pr
68. on then have it fixed so it will be ready to warn vou if there s a problem BRAKE QC If the light comes on while you are driving pull off the road and stop carefully You may notice that the pedal is harder to push Or the pedal may go closer to the floor It may take longer to stop If the light is still on or if the anti lock brake system warning light is flashing have the vehicle towed for service See Anti Lock Brake System Warning Light and Towing Your Vehicle in the Index Your brake system may not be working properly if the brake system warning light is on Driving with the brake system warning light on can lead lo an accident If the light is still on or if the anti lock brake system warning light is flashing after vou ve pulled off the road and stopped carefully have the vehicle towed for service When the ignition is on the brake system warning light will also come on when you set your parking brake The light will stay on if your parking brake doesn t release fully If it stays on after your parking brake is fully released it means you have a brake problem Anti Lock Brake System Warning Light i With the anti lock brake system this light will come on when vou start your engine and it will stay on for three seconds That s normal If the light flashes when you re driving you don t have anti lock brakes and there could be a problem with your regular brakes Pull off the road an
69. or deep scratches in the finish should be repaired right away Bare metal will corrode quickly and may develop into a major repair expense Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch up materials available from your dealer or other service outlets Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in vour dealer s body and paint shop 6 62 Underbody Maintenance Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust control can collect on the underbody If these are not removed accelerated corrosion rust can occur on the underbody parts such as fuel lines frame floor pan and exhaust system even though they have corrosion protection At least every spring flush these materials from the underbody with plain water Clean any areas where mud and other debris can collect Dirt packed in closed areas of the frame should be loosened before being flushed Your dealer or an underbody vehicle washing system can do this for you Chemical Paint Spotting Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create chemical fallout Airborne pollutants can fall upon and attack painted surfaces on your vehicle This damage can take two forms blotchy ringlet shaped discolorations and small irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface Although no defect in the paint job causes this Pontiac will repair at no charge to the owner the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within 12 months or 12 000 miles 20 000
70. other factors 8 9 We prefer you utilize the Customer Satisfaction Procedure hefore you resort to AUTO LINE but you may contact the BBB at any time The BBB will attempt to resolve the camplaint serving as an intermediary If this mediation is unsuccessful an informal hearing will be scheduled where eligihle customers may present their case to an impartial third party arbitrator The arbitrator will make a decision which you may accept or reject If you accept the decision GM will be bound by that decision The entire dispute resolution procedure should ordinarily take about 40 days from the time you file a claim until a decision is made Some state laws may require you to use this program before filing a claim with a state run arbitration program or in the courts For further information contact the at 1 800 955 5 00 or the Pontiac Customer Assistance Center at 1 HO0 PM CARES Warranty Information Your vehicle comes with a separate warranty booklet that contains detailed warranty information 8 10 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury ar death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying General Motors If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of veh
71. parking brake 2 Move the shift lever into PARK P position like this Move the lever up as far as it will go 3 Move the ignition key to 4 Remove the key and take it with you If you can leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your hand vour vehicle is in PARK P Hold in the lever located on the front of the shift knob and push the shift knob all the way toward the front of your vehicle 3 Move the ignition key to LOCK 4 Remove the key and take it with you If you can leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your hand your vehicle 1s in PARK P 2 26 Leaving Your Vehicle With the Torque Lock Engine Running If you are parking on a hill and you don t shift your transaxle into PARK P properly the weight of the vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in the transaxle You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever out of PARK P This 15 called torque lock To It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with prevent torque lock set the parking brake and then shift ha Y hicl ld into PARK P properly before you leave the driver s gine running Your vehicle could move suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P seat To find out how see Shifting Into PARK P in the Index with the parking brake firmly set And if you leave the vehicle with the engine running it could When are ready to drive move the shift lever out of o
72. positions you can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either hand But you have to act fast steer quickly and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the object The fact that such emergency situations are always possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at all times and wear safety belts properly 4 12 Off Road Recovery You may find sometime that your right wheels have dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you re driving OFF ROAD RECOVERY If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the pavement recovery should be fairly easy Ease off the accelerator and then if there is nothing in the way steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement You can turn the steering wheel up to one quarter turn until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge Then turn your steering wheel to go straight down the roadway Passing The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on two lane highway waits for just the right moment accelerates moves around the vehicle ahead then goes back into the right lane again simple maneuver Not necessarily Passing another vehicle on a two lane highway is a potentially dangerous move since the passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming traffic for several seconds miscalculation an error in judgment or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can suddenly put the passin
73. raise or lower the front portion of your seat push the front of the switch up or down To raise or lower the rear portion of your seat push the rear of the switch up or down 2 Way Manual Lumbar If Equipped The knoh that controls this feature is located on the right side of the driver s seat about half of the way down the seathack Turn the knob clockwise to increase lumbar support Turn the knob counterclockwise to decrease lumbar support 4 Way Power Lumbar Driver s Seat If Equipped If you have this option there will be a toggle switch on the left side of the driver s seat cushion just in front of the reclining seatback lever To increase or decrease lumbar support push the switch forward or rearward To adjust the lumbar support up or down push the switch up or down Heated Seat If Equipped If your vehicle has this option the switch is on the center console just hehind the open storage bin Press LO to warm the seat to a lower temperature Press HI to warm the seat to a higher temperature To turn this feature off place the switch in the center position Reclining Front Seatbacks Lift the lever to release the seathack then move the seatback to where you want it Release the lever to lock the seatback in place Pull up on the lever without pushing on the seatback and the seatback will move forward But don t have seatback reclined if your vehicle is moving 1 6 Sitting i
74. regular brake set the parking brake Tocheck the parking brake s holding ability With the engine running and transaxle in NEUTRAL N slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake pedal Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking brake only Tocheck the PARK P mechanism s holding ability With the engine running shift to PARK P Then release all brakes Underbody Flushing Service At least every spring use plain water to flush any corrosive materials from the underbody Take care to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris can collect Part C Periodic Maintenance Inspections Listed helow are inspections and services which should be performed at least twice a year for instance each spring and fall You should let your GM dealer s service department or other qualified service center do these jobs Make sure any necessary repairs are completed at once Proper procedures to perform these services may be found in a GM service manual See Service and Owner Publications in the Index Steering Suspension and Front Drive Axle Boot and Seal Inspection Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering system for damaged loose or missing parts signs of wear or lack of lubrication Inspect the power steering lines and hoses for proper hook up binding leaks cracks chafing Clean and then inspect the drive axle boot seals for damage tears or leakage Replace seals if necess
75. retainer securely When reinstalling compact spare put protective guide back in foam holder Store the cover as far forward as possible Storing the Spare Tire and Tools Storing a jack a tire or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury In a sudden stop or collision loose equipment could strike someone 5tore all these in the proper place The compact spare is for temporary use only Replace the compact spare tire with a full size tire as soon s you can See Compact Spare Tire in the Index See the storage instructions label to replace your compact spare into your trunk properly Be sure to calibrate your check tire pressure system after you replace your compact spare tire with a full sized one See Check Tire Pressure Light in the Index Retainer Cover Retainer Full Size Spare Jack Wrench Lock Nut Tool Foam Bolt Screw 1 Extension and Protector Guide 5 33 Compact Spare Tire Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when your vehicle was new it can lose air after a time Check the inflation pressure regularly It should be 60 psi 420 kPa After installing the compact spare on your vehicle you should stop as soon as possible and make sure your spare tire is correctly inflated The compact spare is made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph 105 km h for distances up to 3 000 miles 5 000 km so you can finish your
76. so your electrical system may be wet The condition will usually be corrected when the electrical system dries few driving trips should turn the light off Are you low on fuel As your engine starts to run out of fuel your engine may not run as efficiently as designed since small amounts of air are sucked into the fuel line causing a misfire The system can detect this Adding fuel should correct this condition Make sure to install the fuel cap properly It will take a few driving trips to turn the light off Have you recently changed brands of fuel If so be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel see Fuel in the Index Poor fuel quality will cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed You may notice this as stalling after start up stalling when you put the vehicle into gear misfiring hesitation on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration These conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up This will be detected by the system and cause the light to turn on If you experience one or more of these conditions change the fuel brand you use It will require at least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off If none of the above steps have made the light turn off have your dealer or qualified service center check the vehicle Your dealer has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix amy mechanical or electrical problems that have developed 2 72
77. start your Pontiac and the bad grounding could damage the electrical systems Put an automatic transaxle in PARK P or a manual transaxle in NEUTRAL 3 Turn off the ignition on both vehicles Turn off all 4 Find the positive and negative terminals on lamps that aren t needed and radios This will avoid each battery Your Pontiac has a remote positive sparks and help save both batteries And it could jump starting terminal The terminal is on the same save your radio side of the engine compartment as your battery You should always use the remote positive terminal 3 instead of the positive terminal on your battery NOTICE If you leave your radio on it could be badly damaged The repairs wouldn t be covered by vour warranty An electric fan can start up even when the engine is not running and can injure you Keep hands clothing and tools away from underhood electric fan To uncover the remote positive terminal lift the red plastic cap Z CAUTION Using a match near battery can cause battery gas to explode People have been hurt doing this and some have been blinded Use a flashlight if you need more light Be sure the battery has enough water You don t need to add water to the Delco Freedom battery installed in every new GM vehicle But if a battery has filler caps be sure the right amount of fluid is there If it is low add water to take care
78. system and brake adjustment Each of these is covered in this manual and the Index will help you find them quickly If you re trailering it s a good idea to review these sections before you start your trip Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight NOTES 4 39 NOTES 4 40 Y Section 5 Problems on the Road WE metu o iD ol imm m me MN MN E Here you ll find what to do about some problems that can occur on the road 3 2 How to Use Warning Flashers 5 15 Cooling System 5 2 Other Types of Warning Devices 5 17 How to Add Coolant 5 3 Step by Step Procedure for Jump Starting 5 23 What to do if a Tire Goes Flat 5 8 Information You Should Know Before Towing 5 24 How to Change a Flat Tire 5 9 Towing Your Vehicle From the Front 5 32 Where to Store the Flat Tire and Tools 5 11 Towing Your Vehicle From the Rear 5 34 Information on the Compact Spare Tire 5 13 If Your Engine is Overheating 5 35 If You re Stuck in Sand Mud Snow or on Ice 5 13 If Steam is Coming From Your Engine 5 35 How to Rock Your Vehicle to Get Unstuck Press the switch top of the steering column to make your front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what position your key is in and even if the kev isn t in Hazard Warning Flashers To turn off the flashers press the switch again When the hazard warning flashers ar
79. t prevent the driver from seeing or from being able to steer the vehicle nor does it stop people from leaving the vehicle 1 26 When an air bag inflates there is dust in the air This dust could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble To avoid this everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so If you have breathing problems but can t get out of the vehicle after an air bag inflates then get fresh air opening a window or door In many crashes severe enough to inflate an air bag windshields are broken by vehicle deformation Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the right front passenger air bag Air bags are designed to inflate only once After they inflate you ll need some new parts for your air bag system If you don t get them the air bag svstem won t be there to help protect you in another crash A new system will include air modules and possibly other parts The service manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace other parts Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and Servicing Your Air Bag Equipped Pontiac diagnostic module which records information about the air bag system The module records information about the readiness of the system when the sensors are activated and driver s safety belt usage at deployment Air bags affect how your Pontiac should be serviced There are parts of the air bag
80. the dealer s facilities equipment and personnel That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you have a concem Customer Assistance for Text Telephone TTY Users To assist customers who are deaf hard of hearing or speech impaired and who use Text Telephones TT Ys Pontiac has TTY equipment available at its Customer Assistance Center Any TT Y user can communicate with Pontiac by dialing 1 800 833 PONT TTY users in Canada can dial 1 800 263 3830 Pontiac Roadside Assistance Program 8 6 Security While You Travel 1 8OO0 ROADSIDE 1 800 762 3743 As the proud owner of a new Pontiac vehicle you are automatically enrolled in the Pontiac Roadside Assistance program This value added service is intended to provide you with peace of mind as you drive in the city or travel the open road Pontiac s Roadside Assistance toll free number is staffed by team of technically trained advisors who are available 24 hours a day 365 days a year We take anxiety out of uncertain situations by providing minor repair information over the phone or making arrangements to tow your vehicle to the nearest Pontiac dealer We will provide the following services for 3 year 36 000 miles 60 000 km at expense to you Fuel delivery Kevs locked in vehicle Tow to nearest dealership for warranty service Change a flat tire Jump starts eee o Courtesy Transportation See Pontiac Courtesy Transportation section
81. the Clock for Stereo Press SET Within five seconds press and hold the SEEK down arrow until the correct hour appears on the display Press and hold the SEEK up arrow until the correct minute appears on the display Playing the Radio Setting the Clock for All Systems Except VOLUME Push this knob to turn the system on and AM Stereo s off To increase volume turn the knob clockwise Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume Press and hold HR until the correct hour appears Press RCL PROG Press this button to recall the station and hold MIN until the correct minute appears There foal ner havea on tl clack will be a two second delay before the clock goes into g pay spray g time set mode and the colon on the display will blink while in this mode 1 T GEER 3 10 Finding a 5tation Press this button to switch between and FM The display shows your selection TUNE Turn the lower knob to choose radio stations SEEK Press the up or down arrow to go to the next higher or lower station and stay there PUSHBUTTONS The four numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations You can set up to 14 stations seven AM and seven FM Just 1 Press AM FM to select the band 2 Tune in the desired station Press SET SET will appear on the display 3 4 Press one of the four numbered pushbuttons within five seconds Whenever y
82. the HUD image may the HUD image look blurred and out of focus To clean the HUD spray household glass cleaner on a soft clean cloth Wipe the HUD lens gently then dry it Do not spray cleaner directly on the lens because the cleaner could leak into the unit 2 86 Y Section 3 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems In this section you ll find out how to operate the comfort control and audio systems offered with your Pontiac Be sure to read about the particular systems supplied with your vehicle 3 2 Comfort Controls 3 10 Radios 3 2 Air Conditioning Air Conditioning with 3 13 CD Adapter Kit Electronic Controls 3 24 Trunk Mounted CD Changer 3 4 Air Conditioning Air Conditioning with 3 26 Theft Deterrent Feature Automatic and Auxiliary Temperature Control 3 29 Steering Wheel Controls 3 4 Heating Air Conditioning with 3 30 Understanding Radio Reception Electronic Controls 3 30 Adding Sound Equipment to Your Vehicle 3 8 Heating Air Conditioning with Automatic 3 30 Tips About Your Audio System and Auxiliary Temperature Controls 3 3 Care of Your Cassette Tape Player 3 8 Ventilation System and Tips 3 32 Care of Your Compact Discs 3 8 Tips for Defogging and Defrosting 3 32 Fixed Mast Antenna 3 9 Rear Window Defogger 3 32 Backglass Antenna 3 10 Setting the Clock Comfort Controls Air Conditioning with Electronic Controls With this system you can control the heating cooling and ventilation in your vehicle The system
83. the engine of the vehicle with the dead battery 10 12 Remove the cables in reverse order to prevent electrical shorting Take care that they don t touch each other or any other metal Attach the cable at least 18 inches 45 cm away from the dead battery but not near engine parts that move The electrical connection is just as good there but the chance of sparks getting back to the battery is much less A Heavy Metal Engine Part Now start the vehicle with the good battery and B Good Battery run the engine for a while i i Dead Battery Try to start the vehicle with the dead battery If it won t start after a few tries it probably needs service 5 7 Towing Your Vehicle Try to have a Pontiac dealer or a professional towing service tow your vehicle If your vehicle has been changed or modified since it was factory new hy adding aftermarket items like fog lamps aero skirting or special tires and wheels these instructions and illustrations may not be correct Before you do anything turn on the hazard warning flashers When you call tell the towing service That your vehicle cannot be towed from the front with sling type equipment That your vehicle has front wheel drive The make model and year of your vehicle Whether you can still move the shift lever Ifihere was an accident what was damaged When the towing service arrives let the tow operator know that this manual cont
84. this button or the SEEK down arrow to search for the previous selection on the tape Your tape must have at least three seconds of silence between each selection for PREV or SEEK to work The tape direction arrow blinks during PREV or SEEK operation Press PREV or the SEEK down arrow to stop searching The sound will mute during PREV or SEEK operation NEXT 2 Press this button or the SEEK up arrow to search for the next selection on the tape If you hold the button the player will continue moving forward through the tape Your tape must have at least three seconds of silence between each selection for NEXT or SEEK to work The tape direction arrow blinks during NEXT or SEEK operation Press NEXT or the SEEK up arrow to stop searching Th sound will mute during NEXT or SEEK operation PROG 3 Press this button to play the other side of the tape 4 Press this button to reduce background noise Note that the double D symbol will appear on the display 3 14 Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation REV 5 Press this button to reverse the tape rapidly Press it again to return to playing speed The radio will play the last selected station while the tape reverses You may select stations during REV operation by using SEEK or TUNE FWD 6 Press this button to advance qu
85. to spill brake fluid on your vehicle If you do wash it off immediately See Appearance Care in the Index Brake Wear Your Pontiac has four wheel disc brakes Dise brake pads have built in wear indicators that make a high pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are needed The sound may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle is moving except when you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly The brake wear warning sound means that soon your brakes won t work well That could lead to an accident When you hear the brake wear warning sound have your vehicle serviced NOTICE Continuing to drive with worn out brake pads could result in costly brake repair Some driving conditions or climates may cause brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied This does not mean something is wrong with your brakes Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help prevent brake pulsation When tires are rotated inspect brake pads for wear and evenly torque wheel nuts in the proper sequence to GM specifications Brake linings should always be replaced as complete axle sets See Brake System Inspection in section 7 of this manual under Part C Perodic Maintenance Inspections Brake Pedal Travel See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to normal height or if there is a rapid increase pedal travel This could be a sign of brake trouble
86. traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher Continued park ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED By BY Long Trip Highway Maintenance Schedule 100 000 Miles 166 000 km Continued 150 000 Miles 240 000 km In hilly or mountainous terrain Drain flush and refill cooling system When doing frequent trailer towing or every 60 months since last service whichever occurs first See Engine Coolant in the Index for what to use Inspect hoses Clean radiator condenser pressure cap and neck Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap An Emission Control Service Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If vou do not use your vehicle under af these conditions the fluid and filter deo not require changing Part B Owner Checks and Services Listed below are owner checks and services which should be performed at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety dependability and emission control performance of your vehicle Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your vehicle make sure they are the proper ones as shown in Part D At Each Fuel Fill It is important for you or a service station attendant to perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill Engine Oil Level Check Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if necessary See Engine Oil in the In
87. vehicle cools down to your desired comfort point the hlower will decrease and the temperature door will move to a warmer position to maintain your desired comfort As the cabin cools down or the sun load decreases the system could switch to air delivered to A C vents and the floor Bi level mode 3 6 Manual Control Fan Buttons The fan buttons select the amount of air you want when the system is not in AUTO The display will show the fan speed by illuminating a maximum of seven fan bars Mode Button The center has several settings to control the direction of airflow when the system is not in AUTO The indicator light on the button will glow when the button is pressed To access the various modes available continue to press the MODE button until the desired mode appears on the display RECIRC This setting recirculates much of the air inside your vehicle and sends it through the instrument panel outlets The air conditioning compressor will run automatically in this setting unless the outside temperature is below 38 F 3 3 C f UPPER This setti ng brings in the outside air and directs it through the instrument panel outlets P a 4 BI LEV This setting brings in the outside air and directs it two ways Half of the air is directed through the instrument panel outlets Most of the remaining air is directed through the floor ducts and little to the defrost and side window vents LO
88. wiping from the center to the edge Be sure never to touch the signal surface when handling discs Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge Fixed Mast Antenna The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes without being damaged If the mast should ever become slightly bent you can straighten it out by hand If the mast is badly bent as it might be by vandals you should replace it Check every once in a while to be sure the mast is still tightened to the rear quarter panel Backglass Antenna If Equipped Your AM FM antenna is now integrated with your rear window defogger into your rear window Be sure that the inside surface of the rear window is not scratched and that the lines on the glass are not damaged If the inside surface is damaged it could interfere with radio reception Because this antenna is built into your rear window there is a reduced risk of damage caused by car washes and vandals If you choose to add a cellular telephone to your Pontiac and the antenna needs to he attached to the glass be sure that you do not damage the grid lines for the AM FM antenna There is enough space between the lines to attach a cellular telephone antenna without interfering with radio reception 5 0 NOTE e NOTES Y Section 4 Your Driving and the Road Here you ll find information about driving on different kinds of roads and in varying weather
89. works best if you keep your windows closed while using it Fan Knob The left knob selects the amount of air you want To turn the fan off turn the knob to OFF The fan must be on to run the air conditioning compressor 3 2 Temperature Knob The center knob changes the temperature of the air coming through the system Turn this knob toward red clockwise for warmer air Turn it toward blue counterclockwise for cooler air Mode Knob The right knob has several settings to control the direction of airflow MAX This setting recirculates much of the air inside your vehicle and sends it through the instrument panel outlets The air conditioning compressor will run automatically in this setting unless the outside temperature is below 38 F 3 3 C Even when the compressor is running you can control the temperature nad 1 a D E UPPER This setting brings in outside air and directs it through the instrument panel outlets m 4 BI LEVEL This setting brings in outside air and directs it two ways Half of the air is directed through the instrument panel outlets Most of the remaining air 18 directed through the floor ducts and a little to the defrost and side window vents FLOOR This setting sends most of the air through the ducts near the floor The remaining airflow comes out of the defroster and side window vents Wa DEFOG This setting allows half of the air to go to the floor ducts and
90. 0 km h to reduce the possibility of engine and transaxle overheating If you have Overdrive you may want to drive in THIRD 3 instead of DRIVE D 4 37 Parking on Hills You really should not park your vehicle with a trailer attached on a hill If something goes wrong your rig could start to move People can be injured and both your vehicle and the trailer can be damaged But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill here s how to do it Apply your regular brakes but don t shift into PARK P yet When the wheel chocks are in place release the regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load 4 Reapply the regular brakes Then apply your parking brake and then shift to PARK P 5 Release the regular brakes 4 38 Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels When You Are Ready to Leave After Parking on a Hill l Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down while you Start your engine Shift into a gear and Release the parking brake 2 Let up on the brake pedal 3 Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks 4 Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks Maintenance When Trailer Towing Your vehicle will need service more often when you re pulling a trailer See the Maintenance Schedule for more on this Things that are especially important in trailer operation are automatic transaxle fluid don t overfill engine oil belts helt cooling
91. 0109 Fuel Door Hinge and Trunk Access Panel Hinges Windshield Washer Solvent Dielectric Silicone Grease GM Part No 12345579 or equivalent Weatherstrip Conditioning Lubriplate lubricant aerosol GM Part No 12346293 or equivalent or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI 2 Category LB or GC LB Hood Latch Assembly Pivats Spring Anchor and Relcasc Pawl See Replacement Parts in the Index for recommended replacement filters and spark plugs 7 45 Part E Maintenance Record After the scheduled services are performed record the Services or Periodic Maintenance can be added on date odometer reading and who performed the service the following record pages Also you should retain all in the boxes provided after the maintenance interval maintenance receipts Your owner information portfolio Any additional information from Owner Checks and is a convenient place to store them Maintenance Record ODOMETER m READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED Maintenance Rx ODOMETER DATE READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED Maintenance Record ODOMETER DATE READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED a JW 7 48 Y Section 8 Customer Assistance Information Here you will find out how to contact Pontiac if you need assistance This section also tells you how to obtain service publications and how to report any safety defects
92. 1 Carefully scrape off excess stain 2 Clean with cool water and allow to dry 3 Ifa stain remains clean it with solvent type cleaner Cleaning Vinyl Use warm water and clean cloth Rub with a clean damp cloth to remove dirt You may have to do it more than once Things like tar asphalt and shoe polish will stain if you don t get them off quickly Use a clean cloth and vinyl leather cleaner See your dealer for this product Cleaning Leather Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth Then let the leather dry naturally Do not use heat to dry For stubborn stains use a leather cleaner See your dealer for this product Never use oils varnishes solvent based or abrasive cleaners furniture polish or shoe polish on leather amp Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned immediately If dirt is allowed to work into the finish it can harm the leather Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces af the instrument panel Sprays containing silicones or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it difficult to see through the windshield under certain conditions Cleaning the Built In Child Restraint Your built in child restraint may be cleaned with mild soap and lukewarm water Don t use household cleaners They may weaken the harness or damage plastic parts The
93. Battery you re not sure ask your Pontiac dealer S100 Code M MUCCA 3800 Code 690 CCA 3800 Supercharged Code 1 TOCCA 6 73 NOTES Y Section 7 Maintenance Schedule This section covers the maintenance required for your Pontiac Your vehicle needs these services to retain its safety dependability and emission control performance 7 2 Introduction to Your Maintenance Schedule 7 6 Long Trip Highway Intervals 7 2 Your Vehicle and the Environment 1 39 Owner Checks at Each Fuel Fill up 7 3 How this Section is Organized 7 39 What to Check at Least Once a Month 7 4 Using Your Maintenance Schedule 7 40 What to Check at Least Twice Year 7 4 Selecting the Right Schedule for Your Vehicle 7 40 What to Check at Least Once a Year 7 3 Short Trip City Definition 7 43 Periodic Maintenance Inspections 7 5 Short Trip City Intervals 7 44 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 7 6 Long Trip Highway Definition 7 46 A Place to Kecord Maintenance Procedures 7 1 IMPORTANT KEEP ENGINE OIL AT THE PROPER LEVEL AND CHANGE AS Protection Plan Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan The Plan supplements your new vehicle warranties See your Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your Pontiac dealer for details Introduction Your Vehicle and the Environment Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your vehicle in good working condition
94. Bey Lock Cylinders Service eoe 1 40 2 2 Laber P STOA O AA ANN EE NAE 4 30 Certification E ee E A Service Parts Identification 22 T EE ARA Tire Loading Information 4 29 Vehicle Identification Number 6 65 Lamps uro PEE CE UE V eid EIE Y 2 38 Re MUN eR Rad oos 2 41 eee ease ME ea EX EET dan 2 40 Rear Assist Handle Reading 2 43 S dfBlick lr eerie a Leaving 2 8 Leaving Your Vehicle with the Engine Running RENEE 2 27 Lei eo ae gaia aed eee 5 9 5 Lights Alr Bag Readiness 1 23 2 65 Anti Lock Brake System Warning ine 4 0 4 7 Brake System 2 66 Charme Syslenm Ta Pu cane 2 06 Check Ere Pressure Ludere em ree e n 2 70 Engine Coolant Temperature 2 74 2 40 Low Coolant Warning 2 73 LOW PM ie con seater a 2 77 Low OI ope cs pac Low Traction sibi PIS rM E 2 69 Low Washer Fluid ee PUN KR EN 2 76 Warning SO Oy SPR E Safety Belt eco oie Se ronan 1 9 2 64 Service SOOM 2 70 Trac System 2
95. E TN DS 5 3 Vehicle Replace rad kd 6 52 22 sa nh Sie emia TU 4 6 Damage Warnings iv Windows Ru Dari MEET EISTCI SC TUTO CIO 6 73 POE DOR c Val 2 31 Identification Number 6 65 NOE nig Gc cce erae RUN Y ch et Era i x MNT LANGE e X EE REDE us 4 29 Windshield Washer 2 E a C EAR SIEGE Lien esas mper n MONDO aOR ANE ICE RAYS CES 2 34 6 32 Ventilation 3 8 FludLevelChsck Ld vu sq wea kA RR aom Ra v 7 39 Visor Vanity MIMOS 4 2 59 Windshield sescenti MViBORR SUB Col lues ux PEE A OR RAE Riera Blade Replacement 6 44 FE cuire ka AED 4 25 Warning 5 7 Hegdlamp 6 66 Warning Lights Gages and Indicators 2 64 Wrecker Towing 5 8 Washer Fluid Windshield 6 32 Wrench 2 2 5 26 _ _ Q1 Y Service Station Checkpoints WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID 2 SECONDARY HOOD RELEASE 6 8 ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
96. ECK TIRE PRESS light the check tire pressure system isn t working See your dealer for service Also see Anti Lock Brake System Warning Light in the Index The check tire pressure system detects differences in tire rotation speeds that are caused changes in tire pressure It will not alert you if the pressure in more than one tire is low or high The system can alert you about a low tire but it doesn t replace normal tire maintenance See Tires in the Index When the CHECK TIRE PRESS light comes on you should stop as soon as you can and check all your tires for damage If a tire is flat see If a Tire Goes Flat in the Index Also check the tire pressure in all four tires as soon s you can See Inflation Tire Pressure in the Index The light will stay on until you turn off the ignition or press the CALIBRATE TIRE PRESS button Don t press the CALIBRATE TIRE PRESS button without first correcting the cause of the problem and checking and adjusting the pressure in all four tires If you press the button when the tire pressures are incorrect the check tire pressure system will not work properly and may nat alert you when a tire is low or high Any time you adjust a tire s pressure or have a tire repaired or replaced you ll need to calibrate the check tire pressure system You ll also need to calibrate the system whenever you buy new tires or have tires repaired 6 47 To calibrate the system 1 Tu
97. ILEAGE SERVICED BY Long Trip Highway Maintenance Schedule 90 000 Miles 150 000 km E Change engine oil and filter or every C Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and 12 months whichever occurs first Rotation in the Index for proper rotation An Emission Control Service pattern and additional information Replace air cleaner filter See footnote An Emission Control Service C Inspect fuel tank cap and lines for damage or leaks Inspect fuel cap gasket for any damage Replace parts as needed An Emission Control Service See footnote C For supercharged engines only Check the supercharger oil level and add oil as needed or every 36 months whichever occurs first See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in this SecHon ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY An Emission Control Service See footnote LL Long Trip Highway Maintenance Schedule 97 500 Miles 162 500 km 100 000 Miles 166 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every C Inspect spark plug wires 12 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service An Emission Control Service 1 Replace spark plugs O Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and An Emission Control Service Rotation in the Index for proper rotation Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter pattern and additional information if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or See footnote more of these conditions n heavy city
98. LUID LUBRICANT Engine oil with the American Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines Starburst symbol of the proper viscosity To determine the preferred viscosity for your vehicle s engine see Engine Oil in the Index 50 50 mixture of clean water preferably distilled and use only GM Goodwrench DEX COOL or Havoline DEX COOL coalant See Engine Coolant in the Index Engine Coolant 7 44 Hydraulic Brake System Power Steering System Automatic Transaxle Key Lock Cylinders Supercharger FLUID LUBRICANT Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid GM Part No 12377967 or equivalent DOT 3 brake fluid GM Power Steering Fluid GM Part No 1052884 pint 1050017 1 quart or equivalent DEXRON III Automatic Transmission Fluid Multi Purpose lubricant Superlube GM Part No 12346241 or equivalent Supercharger Oil GM Part No 12345982 See Supercharger OI in the Index FLUID LUBRICANT Chassis Chassis lubricant GM Part Lubrication No 1052497 or equivalent or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI 2 Category LB or GC LB GM Optikleen Washer Solvent GM Part No 1051515 or equivalent US AGE Hood and Door Hinges FLUID LUBRICANT Multi purpose lubricant Superluhe GM Part No 1234624 or equivalent Engine oil or Lubriplate Lubricant GM Part No 105
99. N STOP OR CRASH IF THE TOP OF THE CHILD S SHOULDERS IS ABOVE THE SLOTS DON T USE THIS CHILD RESTRAINT INSTEAD THE CHILD SHOULD SIT ON THE VEHICLE 5 REGULAR SEAT AND USE THE REGULAR SAFETY BELTS For the child shown here the harness should go through the middle pair of slots B 1 39 Adjusting the Harness Height 3 E i AN erg s or ee al e 1 i i 3 f A 1 7 If the left and right halves of the shoulder harness clip are fastened together separate them 1 Lower the child restraint cushion 1 40 3 Wf the lap shoulder harness is buckled unlatch it by 4 Pull down the seatback part of the pad D pushing the button on the buckle 1 41 5 Select one side of the harness Add some slack to the 6 Feed a small amount of harness slack back into shoulder part by pulling up on the lap part You ll the slot wooed p ia planir 1 RESP TOST OL ELS until you finish Step 9 7 Twist the hamess slightly to remove it from the slot 1 42 9 Twist the harness slightly to route it through the correct slot 8 Move the harness up or down to the correct slot The correct slot is the one that will be at or just above the top of the child s shoulder 10 Pull on the harness Make sure it is properly routed and isn t twisted or flipped over 11 Repeat Steps 5 through 10 for the other side of th
100. OW 6 50 A 6 54 Changing d FID Cleaning A ECCE E rca Compact Spare nce s a A alle Haee dira ty 5 34 Ce orna oc EDAD Iaflaion CRACK os cies recone ccvececcecec scccs 7 39 Inspection and EO Ao TOES 6 48 eese orien einen wie wale o als e A V Ed 4 20 Lll VEI pared Rd tui i ci R ET 6 45 aces wae panes or COS Ea BPR C 6 52 Taction ocassie AA ARR CELER BOR 6 51 Treadwear BEERS Uniform Quality Grading 5 3 WEST iu runny eee eA 6 49 Wheel Replacement 6 52 When It s Time for New 6 49 Top Strap PUY Sa Minar o ED a AE E har Fi Torque Lock Se Pe Ee RAS 2 27 Tonus PGR E NH 5 31 Tow 4 31 Towing Your Vehicle Misa E eA siete 5 8 TIRE OY eU CER 4 9 Trac System Warming Light 2 68 4 10 Trailer CN A TAT E e e SE 4 35 Driving on 2 4 37 lll ener ct eho 4 36 Hitches 4 34 Maintenance When Towing Pu idee Wee 4 38 Parking HU 4 eh 4 38 ipa e
101. Oil Warning Light If you have a problem with your oil pressure this light may stay on after you start your engine or come orn when you are driving This indicates that oil is not going through your engine quickly enough to keep it lubricated The engine could be low on oil or could have some other oil problem Have it fixed right away The oil light could also come on in two other situations When the ignition is on but the engine is not running the light will come on as a test to show you it is working but the light will go out when you turn the ignition to START If it doesn t come on with the ignition on you may have a problem with the fuse or bulb Have it fixed right away If you make a hard stop the light may come on for a moment This is normal Don t keep driving if the oil pressure is low If you do your engine can become so hot that it catches fire You or others could be hurned Check your oil as soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced Damage to your engine from neglected oil prohlems costly and is not covered hy your warranty 2 73 Low Oil Level Light Your engine is equipped with an oil level monitoring system When the ignition key is turned on the LOW OIL LEVEL light will briefly flash If the light does not flash have it fixed so it will be ready to warn vou if there s a problem LOW OIL LEVEL If the light stays on stop the vehicle on a level surf
102. SECOND 2 This position gives you more power but lower fuel economy You can use SECOND 2 on hills It can help control your speed as you go down steep mountain roads but then you would also want to use your brakes off and on Don t drive in SECOND 2 for more than 25 miles 41 km at speeds over 55 mph 88 km h or vou can damage your transaxle Use AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE D or THIRD 3 as much as possible Don t shift into SECOND 2 unless you are going slower than 65 mph 105 km h or you can damage your engine 2 21 FIRST 1 This position gives you even more power but lower fuel economy than SECOND 2 You can use it on very steep hills or in deep snow or mud If the shift lever is put in FIRST 1 the transaxle won t shift into first gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough NOTICE If your front wheels can t rotate don t try to drive This might happen if you were stuck in very deep sand or mud or were up against a solid object You could damage your transaxle Also if you stop when going uphill don t hold your vehicle there with only the accelerator pedal This could overheat and damage the transaxle Use your brakes or shift into PARK P to hold your vehicle in position on a hill 2 22 Shift Lock Release Console Shift If your vehicle s battery should go dead there are two override access slots that will allow you to overnde park lock The first 15 located underneath the s
103. UTO Tap the rear of the switch and the driver s window will open a small amount If the rear of the switch is pressed all the way down and released the window will go all the way down To stop the window while it is lowering press the front of the switch To raise the window press and hold the front of the switch On four door models the driver s window controls also include a lock out switch Press LOCK OUT to stop front and rear passengers from using their window switches The driver can still control all the windows with the lock on Push LOCK OUT again for normal window operation When the orange band the switch is showing the passengers can operate their windows Full Floating Horn The full floating horn is designed so that you may press anywhere on the steering wheel pad to sound the horn Tilt Steering Wheel A tilt steering wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel before you drive You also raise it to the highest level to give your legs more room when you exit and enter the vehicle To tilt the wheel hold the steering wheel and pull the lever Move the steering wheel to a comfortable level then release the lever to lock the wheel in place Turn Signal Multifunction Lever The lever on the left side of the steering column includes your e Tur Signal and Lane Change Indicator Headlamp High Low Beam Windshield Wipers Windshield Washer Cruise Control If Equipped 2 32 T
104. WER This setting sends most of the air through the ducts near the floor The remaining airflow comes out of the defroster and side window vents DEFOG This setting allows half of the air to go to the floor ducts and half to the defroster and side window vents wy DEF This setting directs most of the air through the defrost vent Some of the air goes to the floor ducts and the side window vents The air conditioning compressor will run automatically in this setting unless the outside temperature is below 38 F 3 3 C Air Conditioning On very hot days open the windows long enough to let hot inside air escape This reduces the time for the vehicle to cool down For quick cool down on very hot days use RECIRC If this setting is used for long periods of time the air in your vehicle may become too dry For normal cooling on hot days use UPPER with the A C button pushed in The system will bring in outside air and cool it On cool but sunny days the sun may warm your upper body but your lower body may not be warm enough You can use BI LEV with the A C button pushed in The system will bring in outside air and direct it to your upper body while sending slightly warmed air to your lower body You may notice this temperature difference more al some times than others Heating On cold days use LOWER The system will bring in outside air heat it and send it to the floor ducts If your vehicle has an engine cool
105. Y The 1997 Pontiac Grand Prix Owner s Manual 1 1 Seats and Restraint Systems This section tells you how to use your seats and safety belts properly It also explains the SRS system 2 1 Features and Controls This section explains how to start and operate your Pontiac 3 1 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems This section tells you how to adjust the ventilation and comfort controls and how to operate your audio system 4 1 Your Driving and the Road Here you ll find helpful information and tips about the road and how to drive under different conditions 5 1 Problems on the Road This section tells what to do if you have a problem while driving such as a flat tire or overheated engine etc 6 1 Service and Appearance Care Here the manual tells you how to keep your Pontiac running properly and looking good 7 1 Maintenance Schedule This section tells you when to perform vehicle maintenance and what fluids and lubricants to use 8 1 Customer Assistance Information This section tells you how to contact Pontiac for assistance and how to get service and owner publications It also gives you information on Reporting Safety Defects on page 8 10 9 1 Index Here s an alphabetical listing of almost every subject in this manual You can it to quickly find something you want to read GENERAL MOTORS GM the GM Emblem PONTIAC the PONTIAC Emblem and the name GRAND PRIX are registered trademarks of General Motors Corporation
106. a crash If vou do have a crash you don t know if it will be a bad one few crashes are mild and some crashes so serious that even buckled up person wouldn t survive But most crashes are in between In many of them people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away Without belts they could have been badly hurt or killed After more than 25 years of safety belts in vehicles the facts are clear In most crashes buckling up does matter a lot Why Safety Belts Work When you ride in or on anything you go as fast as goes Take the simplest vehicle Suppose it s just a seat on wheels Put someone on it Get it up to speed Then stop the vehicle The rider doesn t stop 1 10 The person keeps going until stopped something or the instrument panel In a real vehicle it could be the windshield 1 H Here Are Questions Many People Ask About Safety Belts and the Answers Q Won t I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident if l m wearing a safety belt You could be whether you re wearing a safety belt or not But you can unbuckle a safety belt even if you re upside down And your chance of being conscious during and after an accident so you can unbuckle and get out is much greater if you are belted or the safety belts With safety belts you slow down as the vehicle does You get more time to stop You stop over more distance and your str
107. a few seconds after the anti lock system stops adjusting brake pressure or the Trac System stops limiting wheel spin The low traction light also comes on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN If the light doesn t come on then have it fixed so it will be there to tell you when the anti lock brake system or Trac System is active 2 69 Check Tire Pressure Light With the check tire pressure system after you ve driven IO to 20 miles 15 to 30 km the CHECK TIRE PRESS light will come on if the pressure one tire becomes at least 10 psi 69 kPa higher or lower than the other three tires When the CHECK TIRE PRESS light comes on you should stop as soon as you can and check all your tires for damage If a tire is flat see If a Tire Goes Flat in the Index Also check the tire pressure in all four tires as soon as you can See Inflation Tire Pressure in the Index The light will stay on until you turn off the ignition or press the CALIBRATE TIRE PRESS button See Check Tire Pressure System in the Index If the anti lock brake system warning light comes on with the CHECK TIRE PRESS light the check tire pressure system isn t working See your Pontiac dealer for service Also see Anti Lock Brake System Warning Light in the Index 2 70 Malfunction Indicator Lamp Service Engine Soon Light Your Pontiac is equipped with a computer which monitors operation of the fuel ignition and emission c
108. ace and turn the engine off Check the oil level using the engine oil dipstick See Engine Oil in the Index The oil level monitoring system only checks oil level during the brief period between key on and engine crank It does not monitor engine oil level when the engine is running Additionally an oil level check is only performed if the engine has been turned off for a considerable period of time allowing the oil normally in circulation to drain back into the oil pan Engine Coolant Temperature Light This light tells you that your engine coolant has overheated or your radiator cooling fan is not working If you have been operating your vehicle under normal driving conditions you should pull off the road stop your vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible In Problems on the Road this manual shows what to See Engine Overheating in the Index Engine Coolant Temperature Gage You have a gage that shows the engine coolant temperature If the gage pointer moves into the red area your engine is too hot That reading means the same thing as the warning light It means that your engine coolant has overheated If you have been operating your vehicle under normal driving conditions you should pull off the road stop your vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible In Problems on the Road this manual shows what to do See Engine Overheating in the Index Low Coolant Warning Light
109. ading Bad wear e Bad handling e Bad fuel economy If your tires have too much air overinflation you can get the following e Unusual wear e Bad handling e Rough ride e Needless damage from road hazards When to Check Check your tires once month or more Don t forget your compact spare tire It should be at 60 psi 420 kPa How to Check Use a good quality pocket type gage to check tire pressure You can t tell if your tires are properly inflated simply hy looking at them Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they re underinflated Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture 6 46 777 Check Tire Pressure System If Equipped The check tire pressure system can alert you to a large change in the pressure in one tire The system won t alert you before you drive that a tire is low or flat Each time you start your Pontiac vou must drive 10 to 20 miles 15 to 30 km before the system will work properly After you ve driven 10 to 20 miles 15 to 30 km the CHECK TIRE PRESS light will come on if the pressure in one tire becomes at least 10 psi 69 kPa higher or lower than the other three tires The check tire pressure system won t alert you if the pressure in more than one tire is low or high or if the system is not calibrated properly If the anti lock brake system warning light comes on with the CH
110. afety belt and let it go back all the way The safety belt get the additional restraint shoulder belt can provide will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger 1 60 Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear seat But they need to use the safety belts properly e Children who aren t buckled up can be thrown out in Never do this crash i i two children are wearing the same belt The e Children who aren t buckled up can strike other belt can t properly spread the impact forces In a people who are crash the two children can be crushed together and seriously injured A belt must be used by only one person at a time What if a child is wearing lap shoulder belt but the child is so small that the shoulder belt is very close to the child s face or neck Move the child toward the center of the vehicle but be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child s shoulder so that in a crash the child s upper body would have the restraint that belts provide If the child is sitting in a rear seat outside position see Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides in the Index If the child is sitting in rear outside position of a four door model see Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides in the Index If the child is so small that the shoulder belt is still very close to the child s face or neck you might want to place the child
111. ains detailed towing instructions and illustrations The operator want to see them To help avoid injury to you or others e Never let passengers ride in a vehicle that is being towed e Never tow faster than safe or posted speeds Never tow with damaged parts not fully secured Never get under vour vehicle after it has been lifted by the tow truck Always secure the vehicle on each side with separate safety chains when towing it Never use J hooks Use T hooks instead Don t have your vehicle towed the front wheels unless vou must If the vehicle must be towed on the front wheels be sure to follow the speed and distance 3 x restrictions later in this section or your transaxle will be A vehicle can fall from a car carrier if it isn t damaged If these limitations must be exceeded then the adequately secured This can cause a collision ront wheels have to be supported on a dally serious personal injury and vehicle damage The vehicle should he tightly secured with chains or Front Towing steel cables hefore it is transported Don t use substitutes ropes leather straps canvas webbing etc that can be cut by sharp edges underneath the towed vehicle Always use T hooks inserted in the T hook slots Never use J hooks They will damage drivetrain and suspension components When your vehicle is being towed have the ignition turned to the OFF position The steering wheel should be clamped in a straig
112. ake your keys But what if you have to leave your ignition key What if you have to leave something valuable in your vehicle Put your valuahles in a storage area like your trunk or glove box Lock the glove box Lock all doors except the driver s Give the valet key to the valet Then take the master key with you Content Theft Deterrent If Equipped If your Grand Prix has this option it has a theft deterrent alarm system A red light located on top of your instrument panel near the center of the vehicle next to the windshield will flash slowly when the system is armed While armed the doors will not unlock with the power lock switch The alarm will go off if someone damages the vehicle tampers with the trunk lack enters the vehicle without using the key chain transmitter or key to unlock the doors or turns the ignition on Your horn will sound and your headlamps will flash for up to two minutes The system will also cut off the fuel supply preventing the vehicle from heing driven 2 13 Arming with the Power Lock Switch Your alarm system will arm when vou use either power lock switch to lock the doors while any door is open and the key is removed from the ignition if you would like to turn off the power door lock switch arming see Locks and Lighting Choices in the Index The security light flashes quickly to let you know when the system is ready to arm with the power door switches The se
113. aking it to a place that collects used oil If you have a problem properly disposing of your used oil sk your dealer a service station or a local recycling center for help Air Cleaner To check or replace the air filter 1 Loosen the wing nut on the air duct 2 Lift up on the two clips located on top of the filter cover 3 Disconnect duct and reposition while removing the side cover Pull out the filter Be sure to install the air filter and install the cover tightly when you are finished Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to replace the air filter 6 19 See Scheduled Maintenance Services in the Index Supercharger Oil Unless you are technically qualified and have the praper tools you should let your dealer or a qualified service center perform this maintenance Operating the engine with the air cleaner off can When to Check cause you or others to be burned The air cleaner Check oil level every 30 000 miles 50 000 km or every not only cleans the air it stops llame if the engine 36 months whichever occurs first backfires If it isn t there and the engine backfires vou could be burned Don t drive with What Kind of Oil to Use it off and be careful working on the engine with Scc Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index the air cleaner off and use only the recommended oil NOTICE If the air cleaner is off a backfire can cause a damaging engine fi
114. amps dial Turn the dial to the right To turn the fog lamps on press the right side of the fog to increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights lamps switch A light will glow on the switch to let you to the left to decrease the brightness Turn the control know that they on Your parking lamps must be on all the way to the left to turn them off or your fog lamps won t come on Press the left side of the switch to tum the fog lamps off The fog lamps will go off whenever you change to high beam headlamps When you return to low beams the fog lamps will come on again 2 40 Courtesy Lamps When any door is opened several lamps come on These lamps are courtesy lamps They make it easy for you to enter and leave your vehicle at night You can also turn these lamps on by turning the interior lamps dial all the way to the right Illuminated Entry The Illuminated Entry feature will illuminate the interior so that you can see the inside of your vehicle before you enter at night The interior lamps will come on for 40 seconds when vou unlock your doors using the key chain transmitter 1f equipped and the ignition is in the LOCK or OFF position After 40 seconds have elapsed the interior lamps will slowly fade out The lamps will fade out before 40 seconds have elapsed if you Lock all doors using your key chain transmitter e Lock the doors using the power door lack switch When any door is opened ill
115. ant heater vou can use it to help your system provide warm air faster when it s cold outside O F 18 C or lower An engine coolant heater warms the coolant your engine and heating system use to provide heat See Engine Coolant Heater in the Index Ventilation For mild outside temperatures when little heating or cooling 15 needed use LIPPER with the A C button off to direct outside air through your vehicle Your vehicle also has the flow through ventilation system described later in this section Defogging and Defrosting Your system has two settings for clearing the front and side windows To defrost the windows quickly use DEF To warm passengers while keeping the windows clean use DEFOG P Ventilation System Adjust the direction of airflow by moving the louvered vents Your vehicle s flow through ventilation system supplies outside air into the vehicle when it is moving Outside air will also enter the vehicle when the air conditioning fan is running Ventilation Tips Keep the hood and front air inlet free of ice snow or any other obstruction such as leaves The heater and defroster will work far better reducing the chance of fogging the inside of your windows When you enter a vehicle in cold weather adjust the mode knob to FLOOR and the fan to the highest speed for few seconds before driving off This helps clear the intake ducts of snow and moisture and reduces the chance of
116. ant recovery tank If the coolant recovery tank is completely empty add coolant to the radiator See Engine Overheating in the Index Turning the radiator pressure cap when the engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly With the coolant recovery tank you will almost never have to add coolant at the radiator Never turn the radiator pressure cap even little when the engine and radiator are hot Add coolant mix at the recovery tank but be careful not to spill it You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough Don t spill coolant on a hot engine Radiator Pressure Cap NOTICE Your radiator cap is a 15 psi 105 kPa pressure type cap and must be tightly installed to prevent coolant loss and possible engine damage from overheating Be sure the arrows on the cap line up with the overflow tube on the radiator filler neck When you replace your radiator pressure an AC cap 1s recommended Thermostat Engine coolant temperature is controlled by a thermostat in the engine coolant system The thermostat stops the flow of coolant through the radiator until the coolant reaches preset temperature When you replace your thermostat an AC thermostat is recommended _ 29 Power Steering Fluid
117. ar armrest down unlock the access panel and pull it down Rear Armrest Storage If Equipped If you have a trunk access panel you will also have a pull down armrest that contains an open storage bin and two cupholders Your vehicle may have a convenience net You ll see it on the back wall of the trunk 2 57 Put small loads like grocery bags in the net It can help keep them from falling over during sharp turns or quick starts and stops The net isn t for larger heavier loads Store them in the trunk as far forward as you can You can unhook the net so that it will lie flat when you re not using it You will also need to unhook the net for taillamp removal Ashtrays and Lighter The center front ashtray is on the instrument panel To open it pull at the bottom of the ashtray until it is fully open To remove the ashtray cup lift the tabs on the sides of the ashtray cup and pull out Your Grand Prix has one rear ashtray There is either one on the front seat armrest back or one on the back of the center console if you have that option To open the ashtray press the right side and turn it open To remove the ashtray for cleaning press the snuffer as you lift up the bottom of the ashtray NOTICE Don t put papers and other things that burn into your ashtrays If you do cigarettes or other smoking materials could set them on fire causing damage To use the lighter located inside the center front a
118. ary Exhaust System Inspection Inspect the complete exhaust system Inspect the body near the exhaust system Look for broken damaged missing or out of position parts as well as open seams holes loose connections or other conditions which could cause a heat build up in the floor pan or could let exhaust fumes into the vehicle See Engine Exhaust in the Index Radiator and Heater Hose Inspection Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they are cracked swollen or deteriorated Inspect all pipes fittings and clamps replace as needed Throttle Linkage Inspection Inspect the throttle linkage for interference or binding and for damaged or missing parts Replace parts as needed Replace any cables that have high effort or excessive wear Do not lubricate accelerator and cruise control cables Brake System Inspection Inspect the complete system Inspect brake lines and hoses for proper hook up binding leaks cracks chafing etc Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface condition Inspect other brake parts including calipers parking brake etc Check parking brake adjustment You may need to have your brakes inspected more often if your driving habits or conditions result in frequent braking 7 43 Part D Recommended Fluids and Lubricants NOTE Fluids and lubricants identified below hy name part number or specification may be obtained from your GM dealer USAGE Engine Oil F
119. as the instructions say bul Your vehicle has a right front passenger air Never 4 put a rear facing child restraint in this seat Here s why lt Fisk up Me Imon plate and run the and shoulder portions of the vehicle s safety belt through or around the restraint The child restraint instructions will show you how If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child s face or neck put it behind the child restraint A child in rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured if the right front passenger s air bag inflates This is because the back of a rear facing child restraint would very close to the inflating air bag Always secure a rear facing child restraint in the rear seat 1 58 5 Buckle the belt Make sure the release button is 6 Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the the retractor to set the lock safety belt quickly if you ever had to 1 59 Larger Children 7 To tighten the belt feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor while you push down on the child restraint Children who have outgrown child restraints should wear the vehicle s safety belts 8 Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it 18 secure If you have the choice a child should sit next to To remove the child restraint just unbuckle the vehicles Window so the child can wear a lap shoulder belt and s
120. assenger is in a crash that person s chance of being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the person had not been drinking Drinking and then driving is very dangerous Your reflexes perceptions attentiveness and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol You can have a serious or even fatal collision if you drive after drinking Please don t drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking Ride home in a cab or if you re with a group designate a driver who will not drink Control of a Vehicle You have three systems that make your vehicle go where you want it to go They are the brakes the steering and the accelerator All three systems have to do their work at the places where the tires meet the road Sometimes as when you re driving on snow or ice it s easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires and road can provide That means you can lose control of your vehicle 4 6 Braking Braking action involves perception time and reaction time First you have to decide to push on the brake pedal That s perception time Then you have to bring up your foot and do it That s reaction time Average reaction time is about 3 4 of a second But that s only an average It might be less with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with another Age physical condition alertness coordination and eyesight all play a part So do alcohol drugs an
121. automatic transaxle fluid and filter Uses such as found in taxi police or if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or delivery service more of these conditions If vou da not use your vehicle under any of In heavy city traffic where the outside these conditions the fluid and filter do not temperature regularly reaches 90 F require Changing 32 C or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing SERVICED BY ACTUAL MILEAGE Long Trip Highway Maintenance Schedule 52 500 Miles 87 500 km 60 000 Miles 100 000 km 1 Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and 1 Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Fer supercharged engines only Check the Rotation in the Index for proper rotation supercharger oil level and add oil as needed pattern and additional information See footnote or every 36 months whichever occurs first See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in this section An Emission Control Service See footnote T O Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote Continued Long Trip Highway Maintenance Schedule 60 000 Miles 100 000 km Continued 67 500 Miles 112 500
122. be damaged How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged in The answer depends on the outside temperature the kind of oil you have and some other things Instead of trying to list everything here we ask that you contact your Pontiac dealer in the area where you ll be parking vour vehicle The dealer can give you the best advice for that particular area Automatic Transaxle Operation There are several different positions for your shift lever PARK P This locks your front wheels It s the best position to use when you start your engine because your vehicle can t move easily It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set Your vehicle can roll Don t leave your vehicle when the engine running unless you have to If you have left the Your automatic transaxle may have shift lever on the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly steering column or on the console between the seats You or others could be injured To be sure your sc rd edi mar i iw Maximum engine speed is limited when you re in vehicle won t move even when y re fairly PARK P or NEUTRAL to protect driveline level ground always set your parking brake and components from improper operation move the shift lever to PARK P See Shifting Into PARK in the Index If you re pulling a trailer see Towing a Trai
123. ble one and are discussed in greater detail further in your owner s manual Pontiac is focusing on the changing needs of our customers and is committed to giving you an exceptional level of customer care throughout the ownership experience Our goal is to create total customer enthusiasm in our product and our services and make you the most satisfied customer in the world Customer Satisfaction Procedure Pontiac dealers have the facilities trained technicians and up to date information ta promptly address concerns you may have However if a concern has not been resalved to your complete satisfaction take the fallowing steps STEP ONE Discuss your concern with a member of dealership management Normally concerns can be quickly resolved at that level If the matter has already been reviewed with the Sales Service or Parts Manager contact the owner of the dealership or the General Manager STEP TWO If after contacting a member of dealership management it appears your concern cannot be resolved by the dealership without further help contact the Pontiac Customer Assistance Center by calling 1 800 PM CARES In Canada contact GM of Canada Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling 1 800 263 3777 English or 1 800 263 7854 French B 4 For help outside of the United States and Canada call the following numbers as appropriate In Mexico 525 625 3256 In Puerto Rico 1 800 496 9992 English o
124. built in child restraint pad is attached to the child restraint cushion and seatback with fastener strips You can remove the pad machine wash it in cold water on a gentle cycle and tumble dry it on a low heat setting Never bleach or iron the pad and don t dry clean it Care of Safety Belts and Built in Child Restraint Harness Keep the safety belts and the built in child restraint harness clean and dry Do not bleach or dye safety belts or the built in child restraint harness If you do they may he severely weakened In a crash they might not be able to provide adequate protection Clean the safety belts and the child restraint harness only with mild soap and lukewarm water 658 Glass Glass should be cleaned often GM Glass Cleaner GM Part No 1050427 or a liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal tobacco smoke and dust film on interior glass Don t use abrasive cleaners on glass because they may cause scratches Avoid placing decals on the inside rear window since they may have to be scraped off later If abrasive cleaners are used on the inside of the rear window an electric defogger element may be damaged Any temporary license should not be attached across the defogger grid Cleaning the Outside of the Windshield and Wiper Blades If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer or if the wiper blade chatters when running wax sap or other materia
125. cable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards This child restraint is designed for use only by children who weigh between 22 and 60 pounds 10 and 27 kg and whose height is between 33 5 and 51 inches 850 and 1 295 mm and who are capable of sitting upright alone 1 38 The child should also at least one year old It is important to use a rear facing infant restraint until the child is about a year old A rear facing restraint gives the infant s head neck and body the support they would need in a crash See Child Restraints later in this section for more information With this built in child restraint you can adjust the height of the harness Depending on the seated height of the child you can route it through the upper pair of slots A the middle pair of slots B or the lower pair of slots C Q Which slots should I use for my child What if the top of my child s shoulders is above With the child seated the child restraint cushion the highest pair of slots use the pair of slots that 1s at or just above the top A child whose shoulders are above the highest slots of the child s shoulders shouldn t use this child restraint Instead the child should sit on the vehicle s seat cushion and use the vehicle s safety belts MAKE SURE THE TOP OF THE CHILD S SHOULDERS I5 BELOW THE SLOTS THAT THE HARNESS GOES THROUGH CHILD WHOSE SHOULDERS ABOVE THOSE SLOTS COULD BE INJURED DURING A SUDDE
126. can form ice on the windshield blocking your vision Cruise Control If Equipped With cruise control you can maintain a speed of about 25 mph 40km h or more without keeping your foot on the accelerator This can really help on long trips Cruise control does not work at speeds below about 25 mph 40 km h When you apply your brakes the cruise control shuts off Cruise control can be dangerous where vou can t drive safely at a steady speed So don t use your cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads On such roads fast changes in tire traction can cause needless wheel spinning and you could lose control Don t use cruise control on slippery roads un Setting Cruise Control n I I WR j If vou leave your cruise control switch on when vou re not using cruise vou might hit a button and go into cruise when you don t want to You could be startled and even lose control Keep the cruise control switch OFF until you want to use it Move the cruise control switch to ON 3 Push in the SET button at the end of the lever and 2 Get up to the speed you want release IL Take your foot off the accelerator pedal 2 36 Resuming Set Speed Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed There are two ways to go to a higher speed a
127. ck automatically when you move your shift lever out of PARK P All doors will unlock automatically when the ignition is turned off while the shift lever is in PARK P If you prefer to have your doors unlacked automatically at any time see Locks and Lighting Choices in the Index It be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking hrake firmly set Your vehicle can roll Don t leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to If you ve left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure your vehicle won t move even when you re on fairly level ground always set your parking brake and move the shift lever to PARK P If somcone needs to get in or out of the vehicle after the doors have been automatically locked place the shift lever into PARK Unlock all doors by using the power door lock switch or unlock just the door you want by using the inside lever If you have programmed your automatic door locks see Locks and Lighting choices in the Index to unlock the doors when the shift lever is shifted into PARK P the doors will be automatically unlacked for you The doors will be automatically locked when you move your shift lever out of PARK P with the ignition on If you don t want the doors to unlock automatically when you turn the ignition off see Locks and Lighting Choices in the Ind
128. conditions We ve also included many other useful tips on driving 4 2 Defensive Driving 4 15 4 3 Driving Drunk 4 16 4 6 Having Control of Your Vehicle 4 17 4 6 Your Braking System Information 4 22 4 7 Anti Lock Brake Information 4 23 4 9 Trac System 4 23 4 11 Braking in Emergencies 4 35 4 11 Steering Tips 4 27 4 13 Off Road Recovery Tips 4 29 4 13 Passing Other Vehicles 4 31 Losing Control of Your Vehicle Night Driving Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads Tips Before Leaving on a Long Trip Avoiding Highway Hypnosis Driving on Hills and Mountains Winter Driving If You re Caught in a Blizzard Loading Your Vehicle Helpful Hints for Towing a Trailer _ 4 1 Defensive Driving The best advice anyone can give about driving is Drive defensively Please start with a very important safety device in vour Pontiac Buckle up See Safety Belts in the Index Defensive driving really means be ready for anything On city streets rural roads or freeways it means always expect the unexpected Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to be careless and make mistakes Anticipate what they might do Be ready for their mistakes Rear end collisions are about the most preventable of accidents Yet they are common Allow enough following distance It s the best defensive driving maneuver in both city and rural driving You never know when the vehicle in front of you is goin
129. conditions include a small You may want to put winter emergency supplies in of sand piece of old carpet or a couple of burlap bags your trunk to help provide traction Be sure you properly secure these items in your vehicle Have your Pontiac in good shape for winter 4 25 Driving on Snow or Ice Most of the time those places where your tires meet the road probably have good traction However if there is snow or ice between your tires and the road you can have a very slippery situation You ll have a lot less traction or grip and will need to be very careful What s the worst time for this Wet ice Very cold snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on But wet 4 26 ice can be even more trouble because it may offer the least traction of all You can get wet ice when it s about freezing 32 F 0 C and freezing rain begins to fall Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there Whatever the condition smooth ice packed blowing or loose snow drive with caution If you have the Trac System keep the system on It will improve your ability to accelerate when driving on a slippery road Even though your vehicle has this system you ll want to slow down and adjust your driving to the road conditions See Trac System in the Index If you don t have the Trac System accelerate gently Try not to break the fragile traction If you accelerate too fast the drive
130. curity light will stop flashing and stay on when you press the rear of the power lock switch to let you know the system is arming After all doors are closed and locked the security light will begin flashing at a very slow rate to let you know the system is armed Arming with the Key Chain Transmitter Your alarm system will arm when you use your key chain transmitter to lock the doors while the key 1s removed from the ignition The security light will tum on to let you know the system is arming After all doors are closed and locked the security light will begin flashing at a very slow rate to let you know the system is armed Arming Confirmation If remote unlock confirmation is see Locks and Lighting Choices in the Index your headlamps will flash briefly to let you know when your alarm system has armed Disarming with the Key Chain Transmitter Your alarm system will disarm when you use your key chain transmitter to unlock the doors The security light will stop flashing to let you know the system is disarmed Disarming with Your Key Your alarm system will disarm when you use your key to unlock the doors The security light will stop flashing to let you know the system is disarmed If you would like your key to disarm the alarm system see Locks and Lighting Choices in the Index Nuisance Alarms If you experience nuisance alarms alarms which are not caused by the opening of a door and are not desirable you ma
131. d What you do in the daytime can also affect your night vision For example if you spend the day in bright sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses Your eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night But if you re driving don t wear sunglasses at night They may cut down on glare from headlamps but they also make a lot of things invisible 4 16 You can be temporarily blinded by approaching headlamps It can take second or two or even several seconds for your eyes to readjust to the dark When you are faced with severe glare as from a driver who doesn t lower the high beams or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps slow down a little Avoid staring directly into the approaching headlamps Keep vour windshield and all the glass on your vehicle clean inside and out Glare at night is made much worse hy dirt on the glass Even the inside of the glass can build up a film caused by dust Dirty glass makes lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a roadway when you are in a turn or curve Keep your eyes moving that way it s easier to pick out dimly lighted objects Just as your headlamps should be checked regularly for proper aim so should your eyes be examined regularly Some drivers suffer from night blindness the inability to see in dim light and aren t even aware of it didis in Rain and on Wet R
132. d frustration But even in 3 4 of a second a vehicle moving at 60 mph 100 km h travels 66 feet 20 m That could be a lot of distance in an emergency so keeping enough space between your vehicle and others is important And of course actual stopping distances vary greatly with the surface of the road whether it s pavement or gravel the condition of the road wet dry tire tread the condition of your brakes the weight of the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied Avoid needless heavy braking Some people drive in spurts heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking rather than keeping pace with traffic This is mistake Your brakes may not have time to cool between hard stops Your brakes will wear out much faster if you do a lot of heavy braking If you keep pace with the traffic and allow realistic following distances you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking That means better braking and longer brake life If your engine ever stops while you re driving brake normally but don t pump your brakes If you do the pedal may get harder to push down If your engine stops you will still have some power brake assist But you will use it when you brake Once the power assist is used up it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder to push Anti Lock Brakes ABS Your vehicle has anti lock brakes ABS ABS 15 advanced electronic braking system that will help preven
133. d crash Shift down to let your engine assist your brakes on steep downhill slope 4 24 Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL N or with the ignition off is dangerous Your brakes will have to do all the work of slowing down They could get so hot that they wouldn t work well You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill You could crash Always have your engine running and your vehicle in gear when you go downhill Know how to go uphill You may want to shift down to a lower gear The lower gears help cool your engine and transaxle and you can climb the hill better Stay in your own lane when driving on two lane roads in hills or mountains Don t swing wide or cut across the center of the road Drive at speeds that let you stay in your own lane As you go over the top of a hill be alert There could be something in vour lane like a stalled car or an accident You may see highway signs on mountains that warn of special problems Examples are long grades passing or no passing zones a falling rocks area or winding roads Be alert to these and take appropriate action Winter Driving E ESSEN Include an ice scraper a small brush or broom a supply of windshield washer fluid some winter outer Here are some tips for winter driving clothing a small shovel a flashlight a red cloth and a couple of reflective warning triangles And if you will be driving under severe
134. d for at least seven seconds or until the horn sounds when equipped with Content Theft Deterrent Check transmitter 2 11 Trunk Lock To unlock the trunk from the outside insert the master key and turn it You can also use the Remote Keyless Entry transmitter if your vehicle has this option Remote Trunk Release If Equipped Press the button behind the glove box door to unlock the trunk from inside your vehicle Your transaxle shift lever must be in PARK P 2 12 Theft Vehicle theft is big business especially in some cities Although vour Pontiac has a number of theft deterrent features we know that nothing we put on it can make it impossible to steal However there are ways you can help Key in the Ignition If you leave your vehicle with the keys inside it s an target for joy riders or professional thieves so don t do it When you park your Pontiac and open the driver s door you ll hear a chime reminding you to remove your key from the ignition and take it with you Always do this Your steering wheel will be locked and so will your ignition and transaxle And remember to lock the doors Parking at Night Park in a lighted spot close all windows and lock your vehicle Remember to keep vour valuables out of sight Put them in a storage area or take them with you Parking Lots If you park in a lot where someone will be watching your vehicle its best to lock it up and t
135. d repairs may be necessary even if the safety belt ar built in child restraint wasn t being used at the time of the collision If an air bag inflates you ll need to replace air bag system parts See the part on the air bag system earlier in this section NOTES 65 NOTES 1 66 Y Section 2 Features and Controls Here you can learn about the many standard and optional features on your Pontiac and information on starting shifting and braking Also explained are the instrument panel and the warning systems that tell you if everything 15 working properly and what to do if you have a problem 2 2 Important Information About Keys 2 32 Functions of the Multifunction Lever 2 4 Door Locks 2 33 How to Use the High Low Beam 2 8 Remote Keyless Entry Headlamp Changer 2 10 Battery Replacement for 2 33 Windshield Wipers and Fluid 2 12 Preventing Theft of Your Vehicle 2 35 Using Cruise Control 2 15 New Vehicle Break In 2 38 Exterior Lamps 2 15 Igmtion Positions 2 39 Daytime Running Lamps DRL 2 16 Tips on Starting Your Engine 2 40 Interior Lamps 2 18 Using the Engine Coolant Heater 2 53 Rearview Mirrors 2 9 Automatic Transaxle Operation 2 54 Storage Compartments 2 24 Parking Brake Guidelines 2 62 Instrument Panel Overview 2 29 Important Information on Engine Exhaust 2 64 About Your Warning Lights and Gages 2 30 Operation of Your Windows 2 78 Driver Information Center 2 31 Adjusting the Tilt Steering Whe
136. d stop carefully You may notice that the pedal is harder to push Or the pedal may go closer to the floor It may take longer to stop Have the vehicle towed for service See Towing Your Vehicle in the Index 2 67 Trac System Warning Light With the Trac System this warning light should come on briefly as you start the engine If the warning light doesn t come on then have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there s a problem Your regular brake system may not be working properly if the anti lock brake system warning light is flashing Driving with the anti lock brake system warning light flashing can lead to an accident After you ve pulled off the road and stopped carefully have the vehicle towed for service If the anti lock hrake system warning light stays on If it stays on or comes on when you re driving there longer than normal after you ve started your engine turn may be a problem with your Trac System and your the ignition off Or if the light comes on and stays on vehicle may need service When this warning light when you re driving stop as soon as possible and turn is on the system will not limit wheel spin Adjust the ignition off Then start the engine again to reset the your driving accordingly system If the light still stays on or comes on again while you re driving your Pontiac needs service If the light is on but not flashing and the regular brake system warning light isn t on you s
137. d the regular brake pedal down with your right foot Push down the parking brake pedal with your war left foot To release the parking brake hold the regular brake pedal down with vour right foot and push the parking brake pedal with your left foot When you lift your left foot the parking brake pedal will follow it to the released position 2 24 NOTICE Driving with the parking brake on can cause your rear brakes to overheat You may have to replace them and you could also damage other parts of your vehicle If vou are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill see Towing a Trailer in the Index That section shows what to do first to keep the trailer from moving Shifting Into PARK P It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK with the parking brake firmly set Your vehicle can roll If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure your vehicle won t move even when you re on fairly level ground use the steps that follow If you re pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer in the Index Column Shift 1 Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and set the parking brake 2 Move the shift lever into PARK P position like this e Pull the lever toward you 2 25 Console Shift 1 Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and set the
138. dca CAI 2 13 Overdrive Automatic Transaxle 2 21 Creeitiesd Consele re pn eed 2 56 RECUR ERIN eire ibaa he CIAO ER n 5 13 Owner Checks and Services E ER EE 7 39 Owner Publications Ordering 8 12 Paint Spotting Chemical 22 2 2 6 63 Park Automatic Transaxle 2 19 e kr EE ERE dus Shifting Out 2 28 Parking C eaa la RS M E Disk o oa te Snes Facet E P 2 13 Over Things That Burm CRETA Y FORI 2 28 WH APO ee ee Ce lt lt uaa er EA las 4 38 Passeuper Positiot 2 2 2 522 22 4 1 1 22 Passenger s Temperature Knob Automatic and Auxiliary Temp Control Cr o dons POETE EENE 3 5 DHS GIES dra a ala Wie la HA Ara OR ase a 4 13 Performance gt nm 2 23 Periodic Maintenance Inspections 1 43 Pontic Cus Creep eta a Ke LS Roc 8 2 Power Accessory Qutlet cc vasa a 2 56 2 59 Door Locks 4 cess S EE SUE EE 2 3 FUE ry a eos olde a nets a aN EARRA a 6 67 Cuide MITIGE 1 a COPIER C 2 54 AOCBESOTy gt gt 2222 42 GBA SII betes ees eater
139. dex for further details Engine Coolant Level Check Check the engine coolant level and add the proper coolant mix if necessary See Engine Coolant in the Index for further details Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield washer tank and add the proper fluid if necessary See Windshield Washer Fluid in the Index for further details At Least Once a Month Tire Inflation Check Make sure tires are inflated to the correct pressures See Tires in the Index for further details Cassette Deck Service Clean cassette deck Cleaning should be done every 50 hours of tape play See Audio Systems in the Index for further details 7 39 At Least Twice a Year Restraint 5ystem Check Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your belts buckles latch plates retractors and anchorages are working properly If your vehicle has a built in child restraint also periodically make sure the harness straps latch plates buckle clip retractors and anchorages are working properly Look for any other loose or damaged safety helt and built in child restraint system parts If you see anything that might keep a safety belt or huilt in child restraint system from doing its job have it repaired Have any torn or frayed safety belts or harness straps replaced Also look for any opened or broken air bag coverings and have them repaired or replaced air bag system do
140. dge of this part is fuse puller and a fuse usage chart To use the fuse puller place the wide end of the fuse puller over the plastic end of the fuse Squeeze the ends over the fuse and pull it out To reinstall the bin position the lower end and rotate the top into position Press on the sides until it snaps into place 6 67 Y Fuse Description FUSE USAGE CHART WIPER Wipers STR WHL ILUM Steering Wheel Illumination STH WH See woo STR WHL Steering Wheel Control esee Sunroor HVAC HI 3 sw KE RADIO Radio Antenna PWR LOCK Mall Module Power Locks ae a HSEAT LUM Heated Seats Power Lumbar J dq 4 Rear Defog meom occ RAP Retained Accessory Power Cae _ Mall Module HAZARD Hazard Flashers PWR MIR Power Mirrors Circuit Breaker Description HVAC HI HVAC Blower Hi HEADLMP Headlamps CIG LTR Cigarette Lighter ALDL Floor Console Auxiliary Outlet PWR S Power Seat Po Lumbar ET T e EN INT LAMP Mall Module Interior lamps PWR WDO Power Windows Fus Description we sind AUX CNSL Auxiliary Power MALL PGM Mall Module Program Overheard Conacle MAH MIL MOOD CD CHGR CD Changer 6 68 Fuse ECM CRUISE SIR TURN ABS BTSI HVAC CTRL DIC HVAC ABS IGN DRL Description ECM Cruise Control Chime Mall Module Cluster Trip Computer Head Up Display Bra
141. discourage theft af vour radio It works by using a secret code to disable all radio functions whenever battery power is removed The THEFTLOCK feature for the radio may be used or ignored If ignored the system plays normally and the radio is not protected by the feature If THEFTLOCK is activated vour radio will not operate if stolen When THEFTLOCK is activated the radio will display LOC to indicate a locked condition anytime battery power is removed If your battery loses power for any reason vou must unlock the radio with the secret code before it will operate Activating the Theft Deterrent Feature The instructions which follow explain how to enter your secret code to activate the THEFTLOCK system It is recommended that you read through all nine steps before starting the procedure NOTE If you allow more than 15 seconds to elapse between any steps the radio automatically reverts to time and you must start the procedure over at Step 4 1 Write down any three or four digit number from 000 to 1999 and keep it in a safe place separate from the vehicle Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN 3 Turn the radio off Press the 1 and 4 buttons together Hold them down until shows on the display Next you will use the secret code number which you have written down 5 un Press MIN and 000 will appear on the display 6 Press MIN again to make the last two digits agree with your code 7 Press HR to ma
142. dy weight The amount of food that is consumed before and during drinking The length of time it has taken the drinker to consume the alcohol According to the American Medical Association 180 Ih 82 kg person who drinks three 12 ounce 355 ml bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC of about 0 06 percent The person would reach the same by drinking three 4 ounce 120 ml glasses of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1 1 2 ounces 45 ml of a liquor like whiskey gin or vodka It s the amount of alcohol that counts For example if the same person drank three double martinis 3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each within an hour the person s BAC would be close to 0 12 percent A person who consumes food just before or during drinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level There is a gender difference too Women generally have a lower relative percentage of body water than men 4 4 Since alcohol is carried in body water this means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a man of her same body weight when each has the same number of drinks The law in many U S states sets the legal limit at a BAC of 0 10 percent In a growing number of U S states and throughout Canada the limit is 0 08 percent In some other countries it s even lower The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United States is 0 04 percent The BAC will be over 0 10 percent after three to six drink
143. e When you re stuck spin the wheels as little as possible Don t spin the wheels above 35 mph 55 km h as shown the speedometer NOTICE Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of your vehicle as well as the tires If you spin the wheels too fast while shifting your transaxle back and forth you can destroy your transaxle For information about using tire chains on your vehicle see Tire Chains in the Index Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out First turn your steering wheel left and right That will clear the area around your front wheels If your vehicle has the Trac System you should turn the system aff See Trac System in the Index Then shift back and forth between REVERSE and a forward gear spinning the wheels as little as possible Release the accelerator pedal while you shift and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transaxle is in gear If that doesn t get you out after few tries you may need to be towed out If you do need be towed out see Towing Your Vehicle in the Index NOTES n ri e Y Section 6 Service and Appearance Care Here you will find information about the care of your Pontiac This section begins with service and fuel information and then it shows how to check important fluid and lubricant levels There is also technical information about your vehicle and a part devoted to its appearance care 6 2 6 3 6 5 6 5 6 7 6 14 6 21 6 26
144. e cap 1 You can remove the pressure cap when the cooling system including the pressure cap and upper radiator 5 20 3 1L V6 VIN Code M There twa bleed valves One is located on the thermostat housing The other is located on the thermostat bypass tube 3800 V6 VIN Code K amp 3800 V6 supercharged engine VIN Code 1 There is one bleed valve It is located on the thermostat housing You be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough Don t spill coolant on hot engine 4 Fill the with the proper mix up to the base of the filler neck If you see a stream of coolant coming from an air bleed valve close the valve Otherwise close the valves after the radiator is filled 5 Rinse or wipe any spilled coolant from the engine and the compartment 2 Aftertheengine cools open the coolant air bleed valve 5 21 6 Then fill the coolant recovery tank 8 Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper radiator hose getting hot Watch out for the 7 Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank but UN E engine fans leave the pressure cap off 9 By this time the coolant level inside the radiator filler neck may be lower If the level 15 lower add more of the proper mix through the filler neck until the level reaches the base of the filler neck LO TTA CU LEVEL
145. e following 1 Press UNLOCK on the power lock switch 2 Count the number of chimes you hear The number of chimes tells vou which mode your vehicle 15 set for You change the mode by pressing UNLOCK again 3 Repeat step 2 until you hear the number of chimes that matches the mode you want Made 1 Both Off Doors will always lock immediately when you press LOCK on the power lock switch or the key chain transmitter if equipped Mode 2 Lockout Deterrent Only If you leave your key in the ignition with the driver s door open you will not he able to lock the doors using your power locks Mode 3 Last Door Closed Locking Only If the power lock switch or key chain transmitter if equipped is used to lock the vehicle while any door is open and key is out of ignition you will hear three chimes The doors will not lock Five seconds after the last door is closed all doors will lock Mode 4 Both On This combines modes 2 and 3 Remote Driver s Unlock Control Your vehicle comes with this feature set in Mode 2 This means that e When you press UNLOCK on your key chain transmitter the driver s door will unlock and e When you press UNLOCK on your key chain transmitter again all doors will unlock 2 48 To change the factory setting while in the programming mode do the following 1 Press UNLOCK on the key chain transmitter 2 Count the number of chimes you hear The number of chimes tells you which mode your ve
146. e harness Be sure both sides are adjusted to the same height 12 the pad back against the child restraint Don t use the vehicle s safety belts seatback Make sure the harness goes through the slots in the pad that match the height adjustment slots heing used 13 Press the upper edge of the pad against the fastener strip Using the vehicle s regular safety belts on a child Securing a Child in the Built in Child Restraint seated on the child restraint cushion can cause E serious injury to the child in a sudden stop or crash If a child is the proper size for the built in child restraint secure the child using the child restraint s harness But children who are too large for the built in child restraint should sit on the vehicle s regular seat and use the regular safety belts WARNING FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE MANUFACTURER S INSTRUCTIONS ON THE USE OF THIS CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM CAN RESULT IN YOUR CHILD STRIKING THE VEHICLE 5 INTERIOR DURING A SUDDEN STOP OR CRASH SNUGLY ADJUST THE BELTS PROVIDED WITH Now that the harness is adjusted to the correct height for THIS CHILD RESTRAINT AROUND YOUR CHILD your child you re ready to use the child restraint s harness E to secure your child 1 44 If the left and right halves of the shoulder harness 2 If the lap shoulder harness is buckled unlatch it by clip are fastened together separate them pushing the button on the buckle 3 Plac
147. e lamp with your fingers The oil from your fingers will cause the lamp to fail Rotate the lamp socket ring 1 4 turn clockwise to place it back into the headlamp assembly Lift the plastic tab on the electrical connector and replace the connector Carefully replace the headlamp assembly into the vehicle Be careful to avoid scratching or chipping the paint on the vehicle while replacing the assembly Replace the two bolts on the top of the headlamp assembly Close the hood Front Turn Signal l Open the hood and support properly Remove the two bolts from the top of the headlamp assembly Carefully remove the headlamp assembly into the vehicle Be careful to avoid scratching or chipping the paint on the vehicle while replacing Turn the front sidemarker bulb socket 1 4 turn counterclockwise to remove Center High Mounted Stoplamp Open the trunk 5 Remove the bulb from the socket 6 Place the new bulb into the socket 7 Turn the bulb socket 1 4 turn clockwise to replace i Ner he Socket 14 EI replace 2 Reach through the access opening in the trunk and 8 Curefully replace the headlamp assembly into the remove the slotted vent hv squeezing the ends and vehicle Be careful to avoid scratching or chipping pulling down the paint on the vehicle while replacing 9 Replace the two bolts on the top of the headlamp assembly 10 Close the hood i Taillamps 1 Unhook the c
148. e on your turn signals or brake lights won t work Other Warning Devices If you carry reflective triangles you can set one up Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others They at the side of the road about 300 feet 100 m behind also let police know you have a problem Your front and your vehicle rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off Jump Starting If vour battery has run down vou may want to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your Pontiac But please follow the steps below to do it safely Batteries can hurt you They can be dangerous because They contain acid that burn you They contain gas that can explode or ignite They contain enough electricity to burn you If you don t follow these steps exactly some or all of these things can hurt you NOTICE Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage to your vehicle that wouldn t be covered by your warranty Trying to start your Pontiac by pushing or pulling won t work and it could damage vour vehicle I Check the other vehicle It must have a 12 volt battery with a negative ground system If the other system isn t a 12 volt system with a negative ground both vehicles can be damaged 2 Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables can reach but be sure the vehicles aren t touching each other If they are it could cause a ground connection you don t want You wouldn t be able to
149. e the child on the child restraint cushion 4 Select only one side of the harness Pull the lap part of the harness out and place the harness over the child s shoulder If both sides of the harness are pulled out the lap parts will lock If the lap parts lock let both sides of the harness go back all the way so each side will move freely again Then repeat this step pulling only one side of the harness out 5 Push the latch plate F into the buckle until it clicks Be sure the buckle is free of any foreign objects that may prevent vou from securing the latch plates If you can t secure a latch plate see your Pontiac dealer for service before using the child restraint 6 In asingle motion pull the other side of the harness all the way Keeping the harness pulled all the way out place it over the child s shoulder 1 46 7 Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks Pull on both latch plates to make sure they are secure A green indicator will show in each latch plate window If the harness locks before the latch plate reaches the buckle let the harness go all the way back so it will move freely again Then repeat Steps 6 and 7 Be sure to keep the harness pulled all the way out until you buckle it Once both sides of the lap shoulder harness are pulled out of the retractor and buckled the harness will lock 8 Now fasten the left and right halves of the shoulder harness cl
150. e the mode heing displayed Functions FUEL USED Shows the total amount of fuel used since you last reset this mode The amount can be displayed in gallons or liters AVG ECON Shows your average fuel economy since you last reset this mode OIL LIFE Shows a percentage of the oil s remaining useful life The system predicts remaining oil life using inputs from length of drives coolant temperature engine rpm and vehicle speed Each time you get an oil change sure to reset this function so that it will give you an accurate percentage 2 82 To reset the oil life indicator after the oil has been changed press the mode button until the light appears lit next to OIL LIFE Press and hold the reset button for three seconds The oil life percentage should change to 100 RANGE Shows how much farther you can travel with the fuel you have before refueling CHECK TIRE PRESS This light alerts you that a tire is low or flat See Check Tire Pressure Light in the Index LOW WASHER FLUID This light will come on when your ignition is on and the fluid container i5 low DOOR AJAR If one of your doors is left ajar a light will appear next to that door on the vehicle outline PERFORMANCE SHIFT This light comes on when you press the performance shift button located on the console shift to indicate that your vehicle 1s in performance shifting mode See Performance Shifting in the Index BOOST GAGE If you have the superchar
151. e your power door locks to lock all doors when leaving your vehicle When any door 18 open the first time you attempt to lock the doors using the power door lock switch or key chain transmitter will result in three chimes to signal that Last Door Closed Lacking is being used doors can be opened for any reason for five seconds from the time the last door has been closed Five seconds after the last door is closed all doors will lock You can lock the doors immediately by using the power door lock switch or the key chain transmitter to lock again The Last Door Closed Locking feature will not occur and doors will not be locked as a result of this feature when the ignition switch is in the RUN or ACCESSORY position The Last Door Closed Locking feature is not enabled from the factory To turn the Last Door Closed Locking feature on or off see Locks and Lighting Choices in the Index 2 6 Automatic Door Locks Unlocked doors can be dangerous Passengers especially children can easily open the doors and fall out When a door is locked the inside handle won t open it Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked door when you slow down or stop your vehicle This may not be so obvious You increase the chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in crash if the doors aren t locked Wear safety helts properly lock your doors and you will be far better off whenever you drive your vehicle of the doors will lo
152. ed to add anything else Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous Plain water or some other liquid like alcohol can boil before the proper coolant mix will Your vehicle s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mix With plain water or the wrong mix your engine could gel too hot but vou wouldn t get the overheat warning Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned Use a 50 50 mix of clean water and DEX COOL coolant NOTICE If you use an improper coolant mix your engine could overheat and be badly damaged The repair cost wouldn t be covered hy your warranty Too much water in the mix can freeze and crack the engine radiator heater core and other parts If you have to add coolant more than four times a year have your dealer check your cooling system NOTICE If you use the proper coolant you don t have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim to improve the system These can be harmful 6 27 Checking Coolant When your engine is cold the coolant level should be at the COLD mark or a little higher To check coolant level remove the cap on the coolant recovery bottle and verify that the coolant level is up to the COLD fill level on the hose attached to the cap 6 28 If this light comes on it means you re low on engine coolant Adding Coolant If you need more coolant add the proper DEX COOL coolant mixture at the cool
153. el 2 83 Head Up Display 2 Keys Leaving young children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons A child or others could be badly injured or even killed They could operate power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move Don t leave the keys in a vehicle with young children 2 2 _ _ The master used for the ignition as well as all door locks and storage compartments The valet key can be used for the ignition and the two side doors only It will not open the trunk glove hox or fold down rear seat trunk access panel if equipped When a new Pontiac is delivered it will come with a bar coded tag attached to the key ring This tag has a code on it that tells your dealer or qualified locksmith how to make extra keys Keep the code in a safe place If you lose your keys you ll be able to have new ones made easily using this code If you need new master key contact your Pontiac dealer who can obtain the correct key code or in an emergency call Pontiac Roadside Assistance at 1 800 ROADSIDE or 1 800 762 3743 NOTICE Your Pontiac has a number of features that help prevent theft But you can have a lot of trouble getting into your vehicle if you ever lock your keys inside You may even have to damage your vehicle to get
154. elerator pedal all the way to the floor and holding it there as you hold the key in START for about three seconds If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again do the same thing but this time keep the pedal down for five or six seconds This clears the extra gasoline from the engine After waiting about 15 seconds repeat the normal starting procedure 2 17 Engine Coolant Heater Option bo Ex 2 5 a sae ES i 4 L a a 24 h 4 In very cold weather O F 18 C or colder the engine coolant heater can help You ll get easier starting and better fuel economy during engine warm up Usually the coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle To Use the Coolant Heater 1 Turn off the engine 2 Open the hood and unwrap the electrical 3 Plug it into a normal grounded 1 10 volt AC outlet 2 18 Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could cause an electrical shock Also the wrong kind of extension cord could overheat and cause a fire You could be seriously injured Plug the cord into a properly grounded three prong 110 volt AC outlet If the cord won t reach use a heavy duty three prong extension cord rated for at least 15 amps 4 Before staring the engine be sure to unplug and store the cord as it was before to keep it away from moving engine parts If you don t it could
155. emove the MALL PGM fuse from the instrument panel fuse block 3 Turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY 4 You will hear one to four chimes depending upon the features that you have You can now program your choices Leaving Programming Mode To get out of the programming mode just turn the key from the ACCESSORY position to the OFF position and put the MALL PGM fuse back into the instrument panel fuse block Delayed Ilumination Exit Lighting Your vehicle comes with this feature set in Mode 4 This means that e The interior lamps will stay on for awhile after all the doors are closed and e The interior lamps will come on and stay on for a while whenever you remove the keys from the ignition 2 45 change the factory setting while the programming mode do the following 1 Turn the interior lamps dial all the way to the right and then back slightly to the left 2 Count the number of chimes you hear The number of chimes tells you which mode your vehicle is set for You change the mode hy turning the interior lamps dial all the way to the right and then back slightly to the left Las Repeat step 2 until you hear the number of chimes that matches the mode you want Mode 1 Both Off The interior lamps will turn on or off at the same instant that door 18 opened or closed Mode 2 Delayed IHlumination Only The interior lamps will stay on for about 25 seconds after all the doors are closed or until you
156. enance Inspections explains important inspections that your Pontiac dealer s service department or another qualified service center should perform Part D Recommended Fluids and Lubricants lists some products GM recommends to help keep your vehicle properly maintained These products or their equivalents should be used whether you do the work yourself or have it done Part E Maintenance Record provides place for you to record the maintenance performed on your vehicle Whenever any maintenance is performed be sure to write it down in this part This will help you determine when your next maintenance should be done In addition it is a good idea to keep your maintenance receipts They may be needed to qualify your vehicle for warranty repairs Part Scheduled Maintenance Services Using Your Maintenance Schedule We at General Motors want to help you keep your vehicle in good working condition But we don t know exactly how you ll drive it You may drive very short distances only a few times week Or you may drive long distances all the time in very hot dusty weather You may use your vehicle in making deliveries Or you may drive it to work to do errands or in many other ways Because of all the different ways people use their GM vehicles maintenance needs vary You may even need more frequent checks and replacements than you ll find in the schedules in this section So please read this section and note how y
157. ent Arming and Disarming Your vehicle comes with this feature in Mode This means that Your Content Theft Deterrent System will arm when you lock the doors using either the power lock switch while any door 15 open and the key 15 removed from the ignition Your Content Theft Deterrent System will arm when you lock the doors with the key chain transmitter Your Content Theft Deterrent System will disarm when you unlock the doors with your key or with your key chain transmitter To change the factory setting while in the programming mode do the following 1 Insert your second key fully into any door key cylinder and turn it to the unlock position This step is inconvenient but necessary to prevent accidental programming of this feature to Mode 2 Do not program this feature to Mode 2 without first reading the special note contained in the description for that mode The door key lock cylinder must remain in the unlock position during steps 2 4 2 Press the horn symbol on your key chain transmitter 3 Count the number of chimes you hear The number of chimes tells you which mode your vehicle is set for You change the mode by pressing the horn symbol on your key chain transmitter again 4 Repeat step 3 until you hear the number of chimes that matches the mode you want 5 Remove your key from the door key cylinder 2 51 2 52 Made 1 Power Lock Switch Arming Off Your Content Theft Deterrent Syste
158. ent Theft Your vehicle cames with this feature set in Mode 4 This means that e If anyone damages or enters your vehicle while your Content Theft Deterrent System 1s armed an alarm will sound and your headlamps will flash for up to two minutes To change the factory setting while in the programming mode do the following Turn the parking lamps on then off 2 Count the number of chimes you hear The number of chimes tells you which mode your vehicle is set for You change the mode by turning the park lamps on then off again Lad Repeal step 2 until you hear the number of chimes that matches the mode you want Mode I Damage Detection with Less Sensitivity If anyone seriously damages your vehicle tampers with the trunk lock or opens a door while your theft deterrent is armed an alarm will sound and your headlamps will flash for up to two minutes 2 50 Mode 2 Damage Detection Off If anyone tampers with your trunk lock or opens a door while your Content Theft Deterrent System is armed an alarm will sound and your headlamps will flash for up to two minutes Mode 3 Off Your Content Theft Deterrent System is always disarmed Mode 4 Damage Detection with More Sensitivity If anyone damages your vehicle tampers with your trunk lock or enters your vehicle while your theft deterrent system is armed an alarm will sound and your headlamps will flash for up to two minutes Content Theft Deterr
159. epeat If the hubs do not turn easily your tape may be damaged and should not be used in the player Try a new tape to make sure your player 1s working properly Ell The tape is broken Try a new tape If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can t he corrected please contact your dealer If your radio displays an error number write it down and provide it to your dealer when reporting the problem PREY 1 Press this button or the SEEK down arrow to search for the previous selection on the tape Your tape must have at least three seconds of silence between each selection for PREV or SEEK to work The tape direction arrow blinks during PREV or SEEK operation Press PREV or the SEEK down arrow to stop searching The sound will mute during PREV or SEEK operation NEXT 2 Press this button or the SEEK up arrow to search for the next selection on the tape If you hold the button the player will continue moving forward through the tape Your tape must have at least three seconds of silence between each selection for NEXT or SEEK to work The tape direction arrow blinks during NEXT or SEEK operation Press NEXT or the SEEK up arrow to stop searching The sound will mute during NEXT or SEEK operation PROG 3 Press this button to play the other side of the tape IC 4 Press this button to reduce background noise Note that the double D symbol will appear on the display Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured und
160. er license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation 3 17 REV 5 Press this button to reverse the tape rapidly Press it again to return to playing speed The radio will play the last selected station while the tape reverses You may select stations during REV operation by using SEEK or TUNE FWD 6 Press this button to advance quickly to another part of the tape Press the button again to return to playing speed The radio will play the last selected station while the tape advances You may select stations during FWD operation by using SEEK or TUNE AM FM Press this button to play the radio when a tape is in the player TAPE PLAY Press this button to change to the tape function when the radio is The tape symbol with an arrow will appear on the display when the tape is active To return to playing the radio press the AM FM button EJECT Press this button to remove the tape The radio will play may be activated with either the ignition or radio off Cassettes may be loaded with the radio off if this button is pressed first CLN If this message appears on the display the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned It will still play tapes but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to the tapes and player See Care of Your Cassette Tape Player in the Index After you clean the player press a
161. er or litter bag in the Index 2 60 Push the rear of the switch once and the sunroof will open to the vent position only You will need to open the sunshade by hand Push the rear of the switch second time and the sunroof will open the remainder of the way by itself This is the express open feature To close the sunroof push and hold the front of the switch until the sunroof closes The sunshade can only be closed by hand 2 61 Instrument Panel Your Information System United States Version Shown Others Similar Your instrument cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running You ll know how fast you re going about how much fuel is in your tank and many other things you need to drive safely and economically 2 62 Speedometer Odometer Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles per hour mph and kilometers per hour km h Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has been driven in either miles used in the United States or in kilometers used Canada Your Pontiac has a tamper resistant odometer If you see silver lines between the numbers you ll know someone has probably tampered with it and the numbers may not be correct You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a new odometer installed If the new one be set to the mileage total of the old odometer then that will be done If it can t then it will be set at zero and a label mu
162. er for your Pontiac It appears on a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel on the driver s side You can see it if you look through the windshield from outside your vehicle The VIN also appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels and the certificates of title and registration Engine Identification The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code This code will help you identify your engine specifications and replacement parts Service Parts Identification Label You ll find this label on the underside of your trunk lid It s very helpful if you ever need to order parts On this label is e your VIN e the model designation paint information and a list of all production options and special equipment Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle 6 65 Electrical System Add On Electrical Equipment NOTICE Don t add anything electrical to your Pontiac unless you check with your dealer first Some electrical equipment can damage vour vehicle and the damage wouldn t be covered by vour warranty Some add on electrical equipment can keep other components from working as they should Your vehicle has an air bag system Before attempting to add anything electrical to your Pontiac see Servicing Your Air Bag Equipped Pontiac in the Index 6 66 Fuses and Circuit Breakers The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from short circuits by a combinati
163. es not need regular maintenance Wiper Blade Check Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking Replace blade inserts that appear worn or damaged or that streak or miss areas of the windshield Also see Wiper Blades Cleaning in the Index 7 40 Automatic Transaxle Check Check the transaxle fluid level add if needed See Automatic Transaxle in the Index A fluid loss may indicate a problem Check the system and repair if needed At Least Once a Year Key Lock Cylinders Service Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant specified in Part D Body Lubrication Service Lubricate all hinges and latches including those for the hood rear compartment glove box door console door and any folding seat hardware Part D tells you what to use More frequent lubrication may required when exposed to corrosive environment Starter Switch Check Brake Transaxle Shift Interlock BTSI Check When you are doing this check the vehicle could move suddenly If it does you or others could he injured Follow the steps below When vou doing this check the vehicle could move suddenly If it does you or others could be injured Follow the steps below 1 Before you start be sure you have enough room 1 Before you start be sure you have enough room around the vehicle around the vehicle It should be parked on a 2 Firmly apply both the parking brake see Parking level surface Brake in the Index
164. es with proper tread depth See Tires the Index 4 19 A are ways to increase your safety city driving e Know the best way to get to where you are going Get a city map and plan your trip into an unknown part of the city just as you would for a cross country trip Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most large cities You ll save time and energy See the next part Freeway Driving e Treat green light as a warning signal A traffic light is there because the corner is busy enough to need it When a light turns green and just before you start to move check both ways for vehicles that have not cleared the intersection or may be running the red light One of the biggest problems with city streets is the amount of traffic on them You ll want to watch out for what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to traffic signals 4 21 Freeway Driving Mile for mile freeways also called thruways parkways expressways turnpikes or superhighways are the safest of all roads But they have their own special rules The most important advice on freeway driving is Keep up with traffic and keep to the right Drive at the same speed most of the other drivers are driving Too fast or too slow driving breaks a smooth traffic Now Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane At the entrance there is usually a ramp that leads to the freeway If you have a clear vi
165. et 3 Use a clean cloth or sponge and change to a clean area often A soft brush may be used if stains are stubborn 4 Use solvent type cleaners in a well ventilated area only If you use them don t saturate the stained area 5 If a ring forms after spot cleaning clean the entire area immediately or it will set 6 55 Using Foam Type Cleaner on Fabric 1 2 Vacuum and brush the area to remove any loose dirt Always clean a whole trim panel or section Mask surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines Mix Multi Purpose Powdered Cleaner following the directions on the container label Use suds only and apply with clean sponge Don t saturate the material and don t rub it roughly As soon as you ve cleaned the section use a sponge to remove the suds 6 Rinse the section with a clean wet sponge 7 Wipe off what s left with a slightly damp paper towel or cloth 8 Dry itimmediately with a blow dryer Wipe with a clean cloth Using Solvent Type Cleaner on Fabric First see if you have to use solvent type cleaner at all Some spots and stains will clean off better with just water and mild soap If you need to use a solvent Gently scrape excess soil from the trim material with clean dull knife or scraper Use very little cleaner light pressure and clean cloths preferably cheesecloth Cleaning should start at the outside of the stain feathering toward the center Keep changing
166. ever have questions about your tire warranty and where to obtain service see your Pontiac Warranty booklet for details Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are dangerous Overloading your tires can cause overheating as a result of too much friction You could have an air out and a serious accident Loading Your Vehicle in the Index Underinflated tires pose the same danger as overloaded tires The resulting accident could cause serious injury Check all tires frequently to maintain the recommended pressure Tire pressure should be checked when your tires are cold CAUTION Continued Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut punctured or broken by a sudden impact such as when you hit a pothole Keep tires at the recommended pressure Worn old tires can cause accidents If your tread is badly worn or if your tires have been damaged replace them Inflation Tire Pressure The Tire Loading Information label which is on the rear edge of the driver s door shows the correct inflation pressures for your tires when they re cold Cold means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than mile 1 6 km Ss iis Don t let anyone tell you that underinflation or overinflation is all right It s not If your tires don t have enough air underinflation you can get the following Too much flexing Too much heat e Tire overlo
167. every 3 months whichever occurs first 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Contra Service An Emission Control Service Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and L Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving Rotation in the Index for proper rotation in dusty conditions Replace filter if pattern and additional information necessary An Emission Control Service See footnote See footnoteT DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVIC ED BY ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY 18 000 Miles 30 000 km 21 000 Miles 35 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every LI Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service An Emission Control Service Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY 2 ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY 7 10 M PA 3 24 000 Miles 40 000 km 1 Change engine oil and filter or every 27 000 Miles 45 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service An Emission Control Service O Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY
168. ew of the freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp you should begin to check traffic Try to determine where you expect to blend with the flow Try to merge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed Switch on your turn signal check your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as necessary Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow Once you are on the freeway adjust your speed to the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it s slower Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass Before changing lanes check your mirrors Then use your signal 4 21 Just before you leave the lane glance quickly over your shoulder to make sure there isn t another vehicle in your blind spot Once you are moving on the freeway make certain you allow a reasonable following distance Expect to move slightly slower at night When you want to leave the freeway move to the proper lane well in advance If you miss your exit do not under any circumstances stop and back up Drive on to the next exit The exit ramp can be curved sometimes quite sharply The exit speed is usually posted Reduce your speed according to your speedometer not to your sense of motion After driving for any distance at higher speeds you may tend to think you are going slower than you actually are Before Leaving on a Long Trip Make sure you re ready Try to be well rested If you must start when you re not fresh such as after a da
169. ex Rear Door Security Locks 4 Door Models Your Pontiac is equipped with rear door security locks that help prevent passengers from opening the rear doors of your vehicle from the inside To use one of these locks 1 Open one of the rear doors 2 On the inside of the rear door will be a lock Insert your master key into this lock and rotate it upward This will engage the safety lock 2 7 3 Close the door 4 Do the same thing to the other rear door lock The rear doors of your vehicle cannot be opened from the inside when this feature is in use If you want to open the rear door when the security lock is on unlock the door from the inside and then open the door from the outside Leaving Your Vehicle If you are leaving the vehicle take your keys open your door and set the locks from inside Then get out and close the door Keyless Entry If Equipped If your Pontiac has this option you can lock and unlock your doors or unlock your trunk from up to 30 feet 9 m away using the key chain transmitter supplied with your vehicle Your Keyless Entry System operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission FOC Rules and with Industry and Science Canada Rules This device complies with Part 15 of the Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including i
170. fety Belt Use During Pregnancy e D a dn UI F9 bo 1 1 5 1 1 Questions and Answers About Bags Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides How to Use Child Restraints How to Use the Built In Child Restraint Important Information for Buckling Children in Child Restraints Child Restraint Top Straps How to Obtain a Safety Belt Extender Checking Your Restraint Systems Replacing Parts After a Crash ee a NEN Seats and Seat Controls 2 Way Manual Driver Passenger Seat This section tells you how to adjust the seats and explains reclining seatbacks and head restraints Front Manual Seats You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a manual driver s seat while the vehicle is moving The sudden movement could startle and confuse you or make you push a pedal when you don t want to Adjust the driver s seat only when the vehicle is not moving Lift the lever under the front of the seat up using a twisting motion This will unlock the seat Slide the seat to where vou want it and release the lever Try to move the seat with your body to be sure the seat is locked in place Way Power Driver s Seat If Equipped This switch is desiened to mimic the movements of your seat cushion It is located on the left side of the driver s seat cushion To move the seat forward or rearward push the switch forward or rearward To raise or lower the seat push the switch up or down To
171. fluid when you get new brake linings You should add or remove hrake fluid as necessary only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system If you have too much brake fluid it can spill on the engine The fluid will burn if the engine is hot enough You or others could be burned amd your vehicle could be damaged Add brake fluid only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system 6 34 When your brake fluid falls to a low level your brake warning light will came on See Brake System Warning Light in the Index What to Add When you do need brake fluid use only DOT 3 brake fluid such as Delco Supreme 11 GM Part 12377967 Use new brake fluid from a sealed container only Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area around the cap before removing it This will help keep dirt from entering the reservoir With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake system your brakes may not work well or they may not even work at all This could cause a crash Always use the proper brake fluid e Using the wrong fluid badly damage brake system parts For example just a few rops of mineral based oil such as engine oil in vour brake system can damage brake system parts so badly that they ll have to he replaced Don t let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid If you spill brake fluid on vour vehicle s painted surfaces the paint finish can be damaged Be careful not
172. g New Tires To find out what kind and size of tires you need look at ihe Tire Loading Information label The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had a Tire Performance Criteria Specification TPC Spec number on each tire s sidewall When you get new tires get ones with that same TPC Spec number That way your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed to give proper endurance handling speed rating traction ride and other things during normal service on your vehicle If your tires have an all season tread design the TPC number will be followed by an MS for mud and snow If you ever replace your tires with those not having a TPC Spee number make sure they are the same size load range speed rating and construction type bias bias belted or radial as your original tires Reset Tire Inflation Monitor TIM 6 50 Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while driving If you mix tires of different sizes or types radial and bias belted tires the vehicle may not handle properly and you could have a crash Using tires of different sizes may also cause damage to your vehicle Be sure to use the same size and type tires on all wheels It s all right to drive with your compact spare though It was developed for use on your vehicle Uniform Tire Quality Grading The following information relates to the system developed by the United States National Highway Traffic Safety Administra
173. g driver face to face with the worst of all traffic accidents the head on collision So here are some tips for passing e Drive ahead Look down the road to the sides and to crossroads for situations that might affect your passing patterns If you have any doubt whatsoever about making a successful pass wait for a better time Watch for traffic signs pavement markings and lines If you can see a sign ahead that might indicate a tum or an intersection delay your pass A broken center line usually indicates it s all nght to pass providing the road ahead is clear Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or a double solid line even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic 4 13 4 14 Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass while you re awaiting an opportunity For one thing following too closely reduces your area of vision especially if you re following a larger vehicle Also you won t have adequate space if the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops Keep back a reasonable distance When it looks like a chance to pass 1s coming up start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and don t get too close Time your move so you will be increasing speed as the time comes to move into the other lane If the way is clear to pass you will have a running start that more than makes up for the distance you would lose hy dropping back And if something happens to cause you to cancel y
174. g to brake or turn suddenly Drunken Driving Death and injury associated with drinking and driving 18 a national tragedy It s the number one contributor to the highway death toll claiming thousands of victims every year Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a vehicle Judgment Muscular Coordination Vision Aftentiveness Police records show that almost half of all motor vehicle related deaths involve alcohol In most cases these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking and driving In recent years some 17 000 annual motor vehicle related deaths have been associated with the use of alcohol with more than 300 000 people injured Many adults by some estimates nearly half the adult population choose never to drink alcohol so they never drive after drinking For persons under 21 it s against the law in every U S state to drink alcohol There are good medical psychological and developmental reasons for these laws The obvious way to solve this highway safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive But what if people do How much is too much if the driver plans to drive It s a lot less than many might think Although it depends on each person and situation here is some general information on the problem The Blood Alcohol Concentration B AC of someone who is drinking depends upon four things The amount of alcohol consumed The drinker s bo
175. ged engine this gage will show the amount of boost your engine is receiving TRUNK AJAR If your trunk is not fully closed or open a light will outline the trunk area on your vehicle outline TRAC SWITCH If your vehicle has the Trac System this 1s not an available option with the 3800 Supercharged engine you will have a disable switch on the far nght side of your Trip Computer Your Trac System is automatically activated when you tum the ignition on This switch will activate deactivate the Trac System If you need to disable the system such as when you are stuck and are rocking your vehicle back and forth push this switch See Stuck In Sand Mud Ice or Snow in the Index TRAC OFF This light lets you know that your Trac System has been disabled and will not limit wheel spin System Warning Light or Low Traction Light in the Index LOW TRAC This light will come on when your Trac System is limiting wheel spin or when your anti lock brake system is active See Trac System or Low Traction Light in the Index Head Up Display If Equipped If you have the Head Up Display HUD you can see the speedometer reading in English or metric units and a brief display of the current racio station or CD track displayed through the windshield The HUD also shows these lights when they are lit on the instrument panel Turn Signal Indicators High Beam Indicator Symbol Low
176. gh Beam Headlamps Spore ne EX ELTE RITE 2 33 Highway Hypnosis 4 23 Hill and Mountain Roads EURO AH 4 23 Hitches Trailer 4 34 Hood dng TAIPA e sauer EEE 8 7 ER Cee ees 6 5 Hin 2 31 HL 2 83 PROD TANS e a ren c yate dO amm 4 19 Tenition FOREN ceres aua LA E in ara drea faa RR au 2 15 Ignition Transaxle Lock OT 7 42 rernm m edle Xe dE a D DE 6 45 Inside Day Night Rearview Mirror 2 53 Inspections BIER WEIL ee Sle Mee a 7 43 Exhaust Systems 7 43 Front Wheel Drive Axle Boot 7 43 Front Wheel Drive Axle Seal rrr 7 43 Radiator and Heater Hose 7 43 ET EA WAIT 1 43 Suspension TERI EC ATE 7 43 Lig ers 49 EE aci 7 43 Instr ms at Panel ER REE 2 62 yee ra T O 6 38 o acs oats doe IR UR PORE US REA UR 2 52 Page PUG ops sree ae preteen Rese rs eae 6 67 aren a a i Lh Di EE EEEE Ea Ha REIR S IE 2 40 Interioc LADDE eves rar emn men 2 40 Jack Tire O P 5 26 Jump Starting i o Luc D esce re e ES ERE n e PURI
177. ght away If there s still no sign of steam you can idle the engine for two or three minutes while you re parked to see if the warning stops But then if you still have the warning turn off the engine and get everyone of the vehicle until it cools down You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service help right away Cooling System When you decide it s safe to lift the hood here s what you ll see 3800 and 3800 Supercharged Engine Coolant Recovery Tank Electric Engine Fans 3100 Engine Radiator Pressure Cap CAUTION electric fan under the hood start up even when the engine is not running and can injure you Keep hands clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling don t do anything else until it cools down The coolant level should be at or above the COLD mark on the overflow hose in the coolant recovery bottle To check the coolant level remove the cap on the coolant recovery hottle Make sure to check that the coolant level is up to the COLD fill level on the hose attached to the cap If it isn t you may have a leak in the radiator hoses heater hoses radiator water pump or somewhere else in the cooling system A CAUTION Heater and radiator hoses and other engine parts can be very hot Don t touch them If you do you can be burned Don t run the engine if the
178. han necessary To turn the HUD off turn the DIM dial all the way down If the sun comes out it becomes cloudy or 1f you turn on your headlamps you may need to adjust the HUD brightness again Polarizing sunglasses could make the HUD image harder to see CAUTION If the HUD image is too bright or too high in your field of view it may take you more time to see things you need to see when it s dark outside Be sure to keep the HUD image dim and placed low in your field of view Push the ENG MET button on the trip calculator to switch the HUD speed display trom English to metric or metric to English ENG ME i If you don t have the trip calculator you can t change the display Care of the Head Up Display If You Can t See the HUD Image When the Ignition Is On Is anything covering the HUD unit 15 the HUD dimmer setting bright enough 15 the HUD image adjusted to the proper height Still no HUD image Check the fuse in the L P Electronics position in the instrument panel fuse block See Fuses and Circuit Breakers in the Index If the HUD Image Is Not Clear Is the HUD image too bright Are the windshield and HUD lens clean Your windshield is part of the HUD system If you Clean the inside of the windshield as needed to remove ever have to have anew windshield be sure to get one any dirt or film that reduces the sharpness or clarity of designed for HUD If you don t
179. hange engine oil and filter or every Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service An Emission Control Service O Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY BY ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY 45 000 Miles 75 000 km LiChange engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service C Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions Replace filter if necessary Emission Control Service See footnote DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY a __ __ 48 000 Miles 80 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service CI Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 50 000 Miles 83 000 km C Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside If vou do not your vehicle under any of temperature regularly reaches 90 F these conditions the fluid and filter do not 32 C or higher reguire changing hilly or mounta
180. hanger Communication Error e E34 CD Changer Door Open e E35 CD Changer Cartridge Empty If the error occurred while trying to play a CD in the compact disc player or changer the following conditions may have caused the error e The road is too rough The disc should play when the road is smoother The disc is dirty scratched wet or upside down The air is very humid If so wait about an hour and iry again The CD changer door is open Completely close the door to restore normal operation Anempty magazine is inserted in the CD changer Try the magazine again with a disc loaded on one of the trays If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected please contact your dealer If your radio displays an error number write it down and provide it to your dealer when reporting the problem Playing a Compact Disc PREY 1 Press this button to go back to the start of the current track if more than eight seconds have played Press PREV again to go to the previous track on the disc NEXT 2 Press this button to advance to the next track on the disc 3 25 PROG 3 Press this button to select the next disc in the magazine If a CD cannot be played its number will he skipped when selecting discs while using the PROG button RANDOM 4 Press this button to enter the random play mode RDM will appear on the display While in this mode the tracks on the dises will be plaved in random
181. he front of your vehicle during the day DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions but they can be especially helpful in the short periods after dawn and before sunset A light sensor on top of the instrument panel makes the DRL work so be sure it isn t covered The DRL system will make your low beam headlamps come on at a reduced brightness when The ignition is on The headlamp switch is off and The parking brake ts released When the DRL are on only your low beam headlamps will be on The taillamps sidemarker and other lamps won t be on Your instrument panel won t be lit up When it s dark enough outside your headlamps will change to full brightness The other lamps that come on with your headlamps will also come on When it s bright enough outside the regular lamps will go out and your low beam headlamps change to the reduced brightness of DRL To idle your vehicle with the DRL off set the parking brake while the ignition is in OFF or LOCK Then start your vehicle The DRL will stay off until you release the parking brake As with any vehicle you should turn on the regular headlamp system when you need it 2 39 Fog Lamps Interior Lamps Instrument Panel Intensity Control The fog lamps switch is located in the upper leftcomerofth vou can brighten or dim the instrument panel lights by instrument panel to the left of the instrument panel cluster moving the interior l
182. heft Deterrent system the power door lock switch will not unlock the doors until the system is disarmed See Content Theft Deterrent in the Index for more details You can lock all doors from inside the vehicle by pressing the rear of the power lock switch on either door If your vehicle is equipped with a Content Theft Deterrent system the power lock switch may cause the system to arm see Content Theft Deterrent in the Index for more details To unlock any door from outside the vehicle with your key insert it fully into the key cylinder and turn it to the unlock position This will cause only the door you are operating to be unlocked If equipped with content theft deterrent you can unlock all doors by holding the key cylinder in the unlock position for one second Lockout Deterrent The Lockout Deterrent feature makes it difficult for you to lock your keys in your vehicle If the driver s door is open while the keys are in the ignition vou will not be able to to use your power door locks This feature cannot guarantee that you ll never be locked out of your vehicle If you don t leave the keys in the ignition or if you used the manual door lock you could still lock your keys inside your vehicle Always remember to take your keys with you To turn this feature on or off see Locks and Lighting Choices in the Index 2 5 Last Door Closed Locking The Last Door Closed Locking makes it more convenient for you to us
183. hicle is set for You change the mode by pressing UNLOCK again 4 Repeat step 2 until you hear the number of chimes that matches the mode you want Mode Remote All Doors Unlock When you press UNLOCK on your key chain transmitter all doors will unlock Mode 2 Remote Driver s Door and All Doors Unlock When you press UNLOCK on your key chain transmitter once the driver s door will unlock If you press UNLOCK again within five seconds all doors will unlock Remote Lock Unlock Confirmation Your vehicle comes with this feature set in Mode 4 This means that When you use the key chain transmitter to lock your vehicle your headlamps will flash briefly to let you know the command has been received If you press LOCK on the key chain transmitter again the hom will sound briefly and the headlamps will flash briefly to let you know your vehicle is locked When you use the key chain transmitter to unlock your vehicle or open your trunk your headlamps will flash briefly To change the factory setting while in the programming mode do the following 1 Press the LOCK button on the key chain transmitter 2 Count the number of chimes you hear The number of chimes tells you which mode your vehicle is set for You change the mode by pressing LOCK on your key chain transmitter again 3 Repeat step 2 until you hear the number of chimes that matches the mode you want Mode 1 Off Remote lock and unlock confirmation
184. hicle or the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR for either the front or rear axle If you do have a heavy load spread it out Don t carry more than 167 pounds 75 kg in your trunk Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or either the maximum front or rear GAWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break or it can change the way your vehicle handles These could cause you to lose control Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle NOTICE Your warranty does not cover parts or components that fail because of overloading If you put things inside your vehicle like suitcases tools packages or anything else they will go as fast as the vehicle goes If you have to stop or turn quickly or if there is a crash they ll keep going Things you put inside your vehicle can strike and injure people in a sudden stop or turn or in a crash e Put things in the trunk of your vehicle In a trunk put them as far forward as you can Try to spread the weight evenly Never stack heavier things like suitcases inside the vehicle so that some of them are above the tops of the seats Don t leave an unsecured child restraint in your vehicle When you carry something inside the vehicle secure it whenever you can Don t leave a seat folded down unless you need Lo Towing a Trailer If vou don t use the correct equipment and drive properly vou can lose control when you pull a trailer F
185. hildren Smaller Children and Babies Everyone in a vehicle needs protection That includes infants and all children smaller than adult size In fact the law in every state in the United States and in every Canadian province says children up to some age must be restrained while in a vehicle Smaller children and babies should always be restrained in a child or infant restraint The instructions for the restraint will say whether it is the right type and size for your child A very voung child s hip bones are so small that a regular belt might not stay low on the hips as it should Instead the belt will likely be over the child s abdomen In a crash the belt would apply force right on the child s abdomen which could cause serious or fatal injuries So be sure that any child small enough for one is always properly restrained in a child or infant restraint Never hold a bahy in your arms while riding in vehicle A baby doesn t weigh much until a crash During a crash a baby will become so heavy you can t hold it For example in a crash CAUTION Continued at only 25 mph 40 km h 12 Ib 5 5 kg baby will suddenly become 240 Ib 110 kg force on your arms The baby would he almost impossible to hold Secure the baby in an infant restraint If your vehicle has this option there s built in child restraint in the center rear seat position This child restraint system conforms to all appli
186. his position lets you use things like the radio and windshield wipers when the engine is off To use ACCESSORY push in the key and turn it toward vou Your steering wheel will stay locked LOCK B Before you put the key into the ignition switch the switch is in LOCK It s also the only position in which you can remove your key This position lacks your ignition steering wheel and transaxle It s a theft deterrent feature 2 15 OFF C This position lets you turn off the engine but still turn the steering wheel It doesn t lock the steering wheel like LOCK Use OFF if you must have your vehicle pushed or towed Starting Your Engine Move your shift lever to PARK P or NEUTRAL Your engine won t start in any other position that s safety feature To restart when you re already moving RUN D This position is where the key returns after you start your vehicle With the engine off you can use RUN to display some of your warning and indicator lights START E This position starts your engine A warning chime will sound if you open the driver s door when the ignition is in OFF LOCK or ACCESSORY and the key is in the ignition NOTICE If your key seems stuck in LOCK and you can t turn it be sure your are using the correct key if so is it all the way in If it is then turn the steering wheel left and right while you turn the key hard But turn the key only with your hand Using a tool to force it could
187. hould wear a lap shoulder belt and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible below the rounding throughout the pregnancy 1 21 The best way to protect the fetus 15 to protect the Here are the most important things to know about the air mother When a safety belt is worn properly it s more bag system likely that the fetus won t be hurt in 4 crash For pregnant women as for anyone the to making safety belts effective is wearing them properly Right Front Passenger Position The right front passenger s safety helt works the same way s the driver s safety belt See Driver Position earlier in this section You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if vou aren t wearing your safety belt even if you have air bags Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way it will inside the vehicle or being ejected from it Air lock If it does let it go back all the way and start again bags are supplemental restraints to the safety Supplemental Restraint System SRS belts All air bags are designed to work with safety belts but don t replace them Air bags are This part explains the Supplemental Restraint System designed to work only in moderate to severe 565 or bag system crashes where the front of your vehicle hits Your Pontiac has two air bags one air bag for the something They aren t designed to inflate a
188. ht in the Index You should check your engine oi level regularly this is an added reminder LOW OIL LEVEL It s a good idea to check your engine oil every time you get fuel In order to get an accurate reading the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground 6 12 The engine oil dipstick handle is the yellow loop near the front of the engine 3100 Engine 3800 or 3800 Supercharged Engine Turn off the engine and give the oil a few minutes to drain back into the oil pan If you don t the oil dipstick might not show the actual level Checking Engine Oil 3100 Engine 6 14 Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or cloth then push it hack in all the way Remowve it again keeping the tip down and check the level When to Add Oil If the oil is at or below the lower mark then you ll need to add some oil But you must use the right kind This part explains what kind of oil to use For crankcase capacity see Capacities and Specifications in the Index NOTI CE Don t add too much oil If your engine has so much oil that the oil level gets above the cross hatched area that shows the proper operating range your engine could be damaged 3800 3800 Supercharged Engine Fill the oil level to the full mark Push the dipstick all the way back in when you re through What Kind of Oil to Use Oils recommended for your vehicle can be identified
189. ht ahead position with clamping device designed for towing service Do not use the vehicle s steering column lock for this The transaxle should be in NEUTRAL and the parking brake released 4 Attach T hook chains in the front brackets of the cradle on both sides NOTICE Do not tow with sling type equipment or fascia fog lamp damage will occur Use wheel lift or car carrier equipment Additional ramping may be required for car carrier equipment Use safety chains and wheel straps Towing vehicle over rough surfaces could damage a vehicle Damage can occur from vehicle to ground or vehicle to wheel lift equipment To These slots are to be used when loading and securing to help avoid damage raise the vehicle until car carrier equipment adequate clearance is obtained between the ground and or wheel lift equipment Do not attach winch cables or J hooks to suspension components when using car carrier equipment Always use T hooks inserted in the T hook slots 5 10 Rear Towing towing dolly must be used under the drive wheels when towing from the rear Attach a separate safety chain around the outboard end of each lower control arm Note Take care not to damage speed sensor wires when attaching chains Use wheel lift or car carrier equipment Additional ramping may be required for car carrier equipment Use safety chains and wheel straps Do not tow with sl
190. i ELE laid a va Teese DUM aad d 4 11 In 4 12 Tips PMT eee eee E Variable Assist See LAUR ASA ela REA Rie 4 11 ir adii ERE Storage Compartments 2 2 54 SONNEN VITE oe saa e Ex ext Ra 6 37 Stuck In Sand Mud Ice or Snow 5 35 SUD VIBODE a 2 49 aci S date eid dca XR a fa FRA ERE 2 Supplemental Restraint System 1 22 Veluici amp curri iesu wa bial a lalla Wali gg pa v Tachometer Lee heeded OE EHE RE ble eee 22 63 Taillamp Bulh Replacement DS DAC SIEG FE CERERI T 6 42 3 31 Temperature Knob Climate Control System 3 2 AMETE aa E e eR MIR EAE Sd n EE A EY 2 12 Theft Deterrent Feature CD ee eres 3 26 THEFTLOCK 3 26 SOEUR ER a dor kd WES Fone ORE IDE SE 6 29 Third Gear Automatic Transaxle 2 31 Tt Steering Wheel e Raw osx 2 1 Toma CRAM Dit co oro pies ie sie EIC 3 10 Tire Chains CHER EP TE Dance a mee 6 54 eee NA E EA A MICE RE RR ROT E OR RU RUN A 4 29 Tire Loading Information Label 4 20 Tires ae ee Te ee eae ee e EEE init 6 45 Alignment and Balance 6 52 Buying N
191. ible to prevent damage to your tapes and player If you notice a reduction in sound quality try a known good cassette to see if it is the tape or the tape plaver at fault If this other cassette has no improvement in sound quality clean the tape player Cleaning may be done with a scrubbing action non abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrub the tape head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn It is normal for the cassette to eject while cleaning Insert the cassette at least three times to ensure thorough cleaning A scrubbing action cleaning cassette is available through your Pontiac dealership You may also choose a non scrubbing action wet type cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to clean the tape head This type of cleaning cassette will not eject It may not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner After you clean the player press and hold EJECT for five seconds to reset the CLN indicator The radio will display to show the indicator was reset Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality may degrade over time Always make sure the cassette tape is in good condition before you have your tape player serviced 3 31 Care of Your Compact Discs Handle discs carefully Store them in their original cases or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight and dust If the surface of a disc is soiled dampen a clean soft cloth in a mild neutral detergent solution and clean it
192. ickly to another part of the tape Press the button again to return to nlaying speed The radio will play the lust selected station while the tape advances You may select stations during FWD operation by using SEEK or TUNE Press this button to play the radio when tape is in the player TAPE PLAY Press this button to change to the tape function when the radio is on The tape symbol with an arrow will appear on the display when the tape is active To return to playing the radio press the AM FM button EJECT Press this button to remove the tape The radio will play EIECT may be activated with either the ignition or radio off Cassettes may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if this button is pressed first CLN If this message appears on the display the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned It will still play tapes but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to the tapes and player See Care of Your Cassette Tape Player in the Index After you clean the player press and hold EJECT for five seconds to reset the CLN indicator The radio will display to show the indicator was reset CD Adapter Kits It is possible to use a CD adapter kit with your cassette tape player after activating the bypass feature on your tape player To activate the bypass feature the ignition must be on Turn your radio off Press TAPE PLAY and hold for three seconds After three seconds the tape symbol i
193. icles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer or General Motors contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 800 424 9393 or 366 0123 in the Washington D C area or write to NHTSA U S Department of Transportation Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO THE CANADIAN GOVERNMENT If you live in Canada and you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should immediately notify Transport Canada in addition to notifying General Motors of Canada Limited You may write to Transport Canada Box 8880 Ottawa Ontario 332 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO GENERAL MOTORS In addition to notifying NHTSA or Transport Canada in a situation like this we certainly hope you ll notify us Please call us at 1 800 PM CARES or write Pontiac Division Customer Assistance Center One Pontiac Plaza Pontiac MI 48340 2952 In Canada please call us at 1 800 263 3777 English or 1 800 263 7854 French Or write General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 Ordering Service and Owner Publications in Canada Service manuals service bulletins owner s manuals and other service literature are available for purchase for all current and past
194. if necessary and the 2 Firmly apply the parking brake see Parking Brake regular brake in the Index if necessary NOTE Do not use the accelerator pedal and be NOTE Be ready to apply the regular brake ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts immediately if the vehicle begins to move 3 Try to start the engine in each gear The starter 3 With the engine off turn the key to the RUN should work only in PARK P or NEUTRAL N If position but don t start the engine Without applying the starter works in any other position your vehicle the regular brake try to move the shift lever out needs service of PARK P with normal effort If the shift lever moves out of PARK P your vehicle s BTSI needs service 7 41 Ignition Transaxle Lack Check While parked and with the parking brake set try to turn the ignition key to LOCK in each shift lever position amp The key should turn to LOCK only when the shift lever is in PARK P The key should come out only in LOCK Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle PARK P Mechanism Check When you are doing this check your vehicle could begin to move You or others could be injured and property could damaged Make sure there is room in front of your vehicle in case it begins to roll Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should the vehicle begin to move 7 42 Park on a fairly steep hill with the vehicle facing downhill Keeping your foot on the
195. if none of the conditions from the Short Trip City Maintenance Schedule is true Do not use this schedule if the vehicle is used for trailer towing driven in a dusty area or used off paved roads Use the Short Trip City schedule for these conditions Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine under highway conditions causes engine oil to break down slower Long Trip Highway Intervals Every 7 500 Miles 12 500 km Engine Oil and Filter Change or every 12 months whichever occurs first Tire Rotation Every 30 000 Miles 50 000 km Supercharger Oil Check or every 36 months whichever occurs first 3 8L Code engine only Air Cleaner Filter Replacement Fue Tank Cap and Lines Inspection Every 50 0040 Miles 83 000 km Automatic Transaxle Service severe conditions only Every 60 000 Miles 100 000 km Engine Accessory Drive Belt Inspection Every 100 000 Miles 166 000 km Spark Plug Wire Inspection Spark Plug Replacement Every 150 000 Miles 240 000 km Cooling System Service or every 60 months whichever occurs first These intervals only summarize maintenance services He sure to follaw the complete maintenance schedule on the following pages 3 000 Miles 5 000 km The services shown in this schedule up to 100 000 miles 1 Change engine oil and filter or every 166 000 km should be performed after 100 000 miles 3 months whichever occurs first 166 000 km at the
196. ill include the Maintenance Schedule for all models In Portfalio Includes a Portfolio Owner s Manual and Warranty Booklet RETAIL SELL PRICE 15 00 Without Portfolio Owner s Manual only RETAIL SELL PRICE 10 00 CURRENT amp PAST MODEL ORDER FORMS Service Publications are available for current and past model GM vehicles To request an order form please specify year and model name of the vehicle OR ORDER TOLL FREE 1 800 782 4356 Monday Friday 8 00 AM 6 00 PM Eastem Time For Credit Card Orders Only VISA MasterCard Discover ORDER TOLL FREE Orders will be mailed within 10 days of receipt Please allow adequate time for postal gu p NOTE d Holders Only service If further information is needed write to the address shown below or call 1 800 782 4356 1 800 782 4356 Material cannot be returned for credit without packing slip with return Monday Friday 8 00 AM 6 00 PM EST information within 30 days of delivery On retums a re stocking fee may be applied FAX Orders Only 1 313 865 5827 against the original onder PUBLICATION FORM cm ES soo sso sowo ES SEN amp Light Truck Transmission Unit Renair Owner s Manual Portfolio Owner s Without Portfolio NOTE Daalara and Companies provide doalor or company nama and alma ihe name af he parson to whose the shipment should be sent Mail complated enter Torm
197. ill now slide forward If the seat will not tilt lift the seatback latch located on the back of the seat to tilt the seathack forward 1 7 Safety Belts They re for Everyone This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts properly It also tells you some things you should not do with safety belts It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be And it explains the Supplemental Restraint System SRS or air bag system seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in seat and using a safety belt properly Don t let anyone ride where he or she can t wear 2 safety belt properly If you are in a crash and you re not wearing a safety belt your injuries can be much worse You can hit things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it You can be seriously injured or killed In the same crash you might not be if you are buckled up Always fasten your safety belt and check that your passengers belts are fastened properly too Your vehicle has light that comes on as reminder to buckle up See Safety Belt Reminder Light in the Index In most states and Canadian provinces the law says to wear safety belts Here s why They werk You never know if you ll be in
198. ilter or every supercharger oil level and add oil as needed 3 months whichever occurs first or every 36 months whichever occurs An Emission Control Service first See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in this section An Emission Control Service See footnote T O Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY 149 DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY 66 000 Miles 110 000 69 000 Miles 115 000 km LI Change engine oil and filter or every Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Emission Control Service Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY LEChange engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first Emission Control Service C Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY en Maay 75 000 Miles 125 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service L I
199. in the back of the manual It s an alphabetical list of all that s in the manual and the page number where you ll hind it safety Warnings and Symbols You will find a number of safety cautions in this book We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you about things that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning These mean there is something that could hurt yau or other people In the caution area we tell you what the hazard is Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the hazard Please read these cautions If you don t you or others could be hurt You will also find a circle with slash through it in this book This safety symbol means Don t Don t do this or Don t let this happen mn mit Vehicle Damage Warnings In the notice area we tell you about something that can damage your vehicle Many times this damage would Also in this book you will find these notices not be covered your warranty and it could be costly But the notice will tell you what to do to help avoid NOTICE the damage When read other manuals you might see CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in different words These mean there is something that could damage vour vehicle You ll also see warning labels on your vehicle They use the same words CAUTION or NOTICE Vehicle Symbols These are some of the symbols you may find on your vehicle These sy
200. ing it Automatic Control For the most efficient operation you should set the system temperature and press AUTO The system will select the best fan speed and airflow settings to keep you comfortable The air conditioning compressor will run if the outside temperature is above 38 F 3 3 C You may notice a delay of three to four minutes before the fan comes on Driver s Temperature Knoh The left knob sets the temperature for the entire system when the light on DUAL button isn t lit If the light is lit the knob sets the temperature for the driver Turn the knob toward red clockwise to raise the desired cabin temperature Turn it toward bluc counterclockwise to lower the temperature The display will show your selection for a few seconds then the outside temperature will show or be displayed Passenger s Temperature Knob The right knob sets the desired cabin temperature for the passenger and will automatically force the system into a dual zone operation lighting the dual zone button light the right knob toward red clockwise to raise the temperature Turn it toward blue counterclockwise to lower the temperature Dual Zone Button Light The dual zone button light indicates whether the system is in single zone or dual zone operation When there is no desire for dual zone operation push the lit dual zone button to return to single zone operation The dual zone button light will go off The system will opera
201. ing type equipment or the rear bumper fascia will be damaged Towing a vehicle over rough surfaces could damage a vehicle Damage can occur from vehicle to ground or vehicle to wheel lift equipment To help avoid damage install a towing dolly and raise the vehicle until adequate clearance is obtained hetween the ground and or wheel lift equipment Do not attach winch cables or J hooks to suspension components when using car carrier equipment Always use T hooks inserted in the T hook slots Attach T hook chains to the T hook slots in the floor pan support rails just ahead of the rear wheels beth sides These slots are to be used when loading and securing to car carrier equipment chain around the outboard end of both lateral arms Attach a separate safety If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine Please take care not to damage speed sensor wires or brake hoses when attaching chains and T hooks Engine Overheating You will find a coolant temperature gage and warning light about a hot engine on your instrument panel See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage and Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light in the Index You also have a low coolant light on your instrument panel Sec Low Coolant Light in the Index Steam from an overheated engine burn you badly even if you just open the hood Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it Just turn it off and get everyone away f
202. inous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY 7 16 51 000 Miles 85 000 km 54 000 Miles 90 000 km U Change engine oil and filter or every 1 Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first 3 months whichever occurs first Emission Control Service Emission Control Service O Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote SERVICED BY ACTUAL MILEAGE 57 000 Miles 95 000 km C Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY Short Trip City Maintenance Schedule 60 000 Miles 100 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Contral Service Inspect engine accessory drive belt An Emission Control Service Inspect camshaft timing belt An Emission Control Service See footnote Replace air cleaner filter An Emission Control Service Inspect fuel tank cap and lines for damage or leaks Inspect fuel cap gasket for any damage Replace parts as needed An Emission Control Service See footnote 63 000 Miles 105 000 km CI For supercharged engines only Check the L Change engine oil and f
203. int has one Put the restraint on the seat Follow the instructions for the child restraint 2 Secure the child in the child restraint as the instructions siy 4 Buckle the belt Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if vou ever had to Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock 6 To tighten the belt feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor while you push down on the child restraint 7 Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure To remove the child restraint just unbuckle the vehicle s safety belt and let it go back all the way The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger 1 55 Securing a Child Restraint the Center Rear Seat Position You ll be using the lap belt child in a child restraint in the center front seat can be badly injured by the right front passenger air bag if it inflates Never secure a child restraint the center front seat It s always better to secure a child restraint in the rear seat You may however secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front passenger seat but only with the seat moved all the way back See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint has one Make the belt as long as possible by tilting the
204. ip together The indicator window H on the clip will show green when the two halves are fastened together The purpose of this clip is to help keep the harness positioned on the child s shoulders An unfastened shoulder harness clip won t help keep the harness in place on the child s shoulders If the harness isn t on the child s shoulders it won t be able to restrain the child s upper body in sudden stop or crash The child could be seriously injured Make sure the harness clip is properly fastened 1 48 9 On both sides of the harness pull up on the lap part 10 Adjust the position of the harness on the child s little to be sure it s locked shoulders bv moving the clip up or down along the If the harness isn t locked or if it becomes too tight ieri x NEM RUNE unfasten the harness clip Then unlatch the harness assets vast diy ales edd ni M 5 harness should be away from the child s face and by pushing the button on the buckle and let both ck but not falling off the child s shoulders sides of the harness go all the way back so they will Be che move freely again Then repeat Steps 4 through 8 If the harness still doesn t lock don t use the child restraint See your dealer to have the built in child restraint serviced 1 49 Removing the Child from the Built in Child Restraint 2 Unlatch the harness b
205. is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions n heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 or higher ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY p p 150 000 Miles 240 000 km In hilly or mountainous terrain O Drain flush and refill cooling system When doing frequent trailer towing or every 60 months since last service whichever occurs first See Engine Coolant in the Index for what to use Inspect hoses Clean radiator condenser pressure cap and neck Pressure test cooling system and pressure cap An Emission Contro Service Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehicle under any af these conditions the fluid filter do not require changing pare ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY 7 27 The services shown in this schedule up to 100 000 miles 166 000 km should be performed after 100 000 miles 166 000 km at the same intervals The services shown at 150 000 miles 240 000 km should be performed at the same interval after 150 000 miles 240 000 km See Owner Checks and Services and Periodic Maintenance Inspections following Footnotes F The U S Environmental Protection Agency or the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion
206. ke Transaxle Shift Interlock Supplemental Inflatable Restraint Air Bag Turn Signal Anti Lock Brakes PRNDL Brake Transaxle Shift Interlock Blower Control HVAC Rear Defog HVAC Driver Information Center Daytime Running Lamps Heated Seats Anti Lock Brakes Ignition Daytime Running Lamps Underhood Electrical Center Passenger s Side Some fuses are in a fuse block on the passenger s side of the engine compartment Pull off the cover labeled FUSES to expose the fuses 6 69 6 70 FIERDL Mar 1 IEN MR 2 40 E TRAE eS FLIEL PUMP Bhir FUEL SPEED m MCRIULE Ac HODE EDS LP Fuse FUTURE PARK LP FOG LP FUTURE ECM FUEL PMP TCC ALT Description Spare Chime Mall Module Taillamps Park Lamps Sidemarker Lamps Dimmable Lamps Fog Lamps Spare ECM PCM Fuel Pump Automatic Transaxle Enable Switch Shift PWM Alt Sense Fuse RADIO AC CLU B U LP IGN MODULE IGNI UH INJ Description Radio Remote Lock Control Theft Shock Sensor Trip Computer HVAC Module ABS Module Security LED AC Clutch Trunk Release Back Up Lamps Ignition Module Heated Sensors Canister Prg Boost Solenoid Fuel Injectors 6 71 Replacement Bulbs Exterior Lamps Bulb Number Back Up n rrr Ee nian Center High Mounted Stop rocks aure IA
207. ke the first one or two digits agree with your code 8 Press AM FM after vou have confirmed that the code matches the secret code you have written down The display will show REP to let you know that you need to repeat Steps 5 through 7 to confirm your secret code 9 Press and this time the display will show SEC to let you know that your radio is secure Note that with the ignition off the THEFTLOCK indicator will flash indicating a secured radio Unlocking the Theft Deterrent Feature After a Power Loss Enter your secret code as follows pause no more than 15 seconds between steps LOC appears when the ignition is on 2 Press MIN and 000 will appear on the display 3 Press MIN again to make the last two digits agree with your code 4 Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree with your code 5 Press AM FM after you have confirmed that the code matches the secret code you have written down The display will show SEC indicating the radio 1s now operable and secure 3 27 If you enter the wrong code eight times INOP will appear on the display You will have to wait an hour with the ignition on before you can try again When you try again you will only have three chances to enter the correct code before INOP appears If you lose or forget your code contact your dealer Disabling the Theft Deterrent Feature Enter your secret code as follows pause no more than 15 seconds between steps
208. key to RUN If the modules the wiring and the crash sensing and light doesn t come on then have it fixed so it will be diagnostic module For more information on the air bag ready to warn you if there is a problem system see Air Bag in the Index This light will come on when you start your engine and it will flash for a few seconds Then the light SRS AIR BAG should go out This means the system 15 ready 2 65 Charging System Light The charging system light will come on briefly when you turn on the ignition as a check to show you it s working Then it will Eo out If it stays or comes on while you are driving you have a problem with the charging system It could indicate that vou have a loose drive belt or another electrical problem Have it checked right away Driving while this light is on could drain your battery If you must drive a short distance with the light on be certain to turn off all your accessories such as the radio and air conditioner 2 66 Brake System Warning Light Your Pontiac s hydraulic brake system is divided into two parts If one part isn t working the other part can still work and stop you For good braking though you need both parts working well If the warning light comes on there could he a brake problem Have your brake system inspected right away This light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN IF it doesn t come
209. king noise when you drive If it s bad enough it can damage your engine 6 3 If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission Standards indicated on the underhood tune up label it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California specifications If such fuels are not available in states adopting California emissions standards your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications but emission control system performance may be affected The malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel may turn on and or your vehicle may fail a smog check test If this occurs return to your authorized Pontiac dealer for diagnosis to determine the cause of failure In the event it is determined that the cause of the condition is the type of fuels used repairs may not be covered by your warranty Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low emissions contain an octane enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadlenyl manganese tricarbonyl ask your service station operator whether or not his fuel contains MMT General Motors does not recommend the use of such gasolines If fuels containing are used spark plug life may be reduced and your emission control system performance may be affected The malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel may turn on If this occurs return to your authorized Pontiac dealer for service To provide cleaner air all gasolines in the United States are
210. l may be on the blade or windshield Clean the outside of the windshield with GM Windshield Cleaner Bon Ami Powder non scratching glass cleaning powder GM Part 1050011 The windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse it with water Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades and affect their performance Clean the blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full strength windshield washer solvent Then rinse the blade with water Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary replace blades that look worn 6 59 Weatherstrips Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer seal better and not stick or squeak Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every six months During very cold damp weather more frequent application be required See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index Cleaning the Outside of Your Pontiac The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty depth of calor gloss retention and durability Washing Your Vehicle The hest way to preserve your vehicle s finish is to keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water Don t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun Don t use strong soaps or chemical detergents Use liquid hand dish or car washing mild detergent soaps Don t use cleaning agents that are petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives All cleaning agents should be flushed promptly a
211. l qc 4 33 Tongue Weight Grad qu A i qi VER gei d A A S 4 33 Tota Weight on Tiree e ascia ee xe mn 4 34 d a EHE aM ar ee ICE TA 4 31 io order 23 E FUE E 4 37 YAN IIR 4 33 Transaxle Automatle 5542 2 2 5221 6 6 21 Transmitters Remote Keyless Entry 2 8 Transportation Courtesy 2 2 8 8 EC CONNIE en eee hes 2 80 ee eee ES EAD A 2 63 BM Sr e VEIT Ce ET Free EMEN RU Dok o verre uem Ga X AT cR RE E e ERE 2 12 Peleas KENES censor eese prim my mo 2 12 Trunk Access Panel rU Eq iq rei 2 57 Trunk Ajar Warming Light 2 77 Trunk Mounted CD Changer 3 24 Eoee 8 5 Turn Signal and Lane Change Signals rere 2 32 Tum Signal On gt gt 2 33 Turn Signal Multifunction 2 32 Turn Signals When Towing Trailer 4 37 Two Way Manual Front 5 1 2 9 10 SSS ac Underbody Flushing Service 22 22222 7 42 Washing Your Vehicle 6 60 Underbody Maintenance 6 63 Weatherstrips eee ae a a ce 6 60 Underbood Electrical Center 6 69 Wheel REN i ay ee ER ane ER E es 6 32 SUCTOLDU
212. latch plate to make sure it 15 secure When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way it will lock If it does let it go back all the way and start again If the belt is not long enough see Safety Belt Extender at the end of this section Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to 3 To make the lap part tight pull down on the buckle end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part The lap part of the helt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the thighs In crash this applies force to the strong pelvic bones And you d be less likely to slide under the lap belt If you slid under it the belt would apply force at your abdomen This could cause serious or even fatal injuries The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest These parts of the body best able to take belt restraining forces The safety belt locks if there s a sudden stop or a crash or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is ioo loose In a crash you would move forward too much which could increase injury The shoulder belt should fit against your body To unlatch the belt just push the button on the buckle Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children and Small Adults Rear shoulder belt comfort guides will provide added safety
213. lators from newspapers burlap bags rags floor mats anything you can wrap around yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle This can cause deadly CO carbon monoxide gas to get inside CO could overcome you and kill you You can t see it or smell it so you might not know it is in your vehicle Clear away snow from around the base of your vehicle especially any that is blocking your exhaust pipe And check around again from time to time to be sure snow doesn t collect there Open a window just a little on the side of the vehicle that s away from the wind This will help keep CO out You can run the engine to keep warm but be careful 4 28 Run your engine only as long s you must This saves fuel When you run the engine make it go a little faster than just idle That is push the accelerator slightly This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the battery charged You will need a well charged battery to restart the vehicle and possibly for signaling later on with your headlamps Let the heater run for a while Then shut the engine off and close the window almost all the way to preserve the heat Start the engine again and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable from the cold But do it as little as possible Preserve the fuel as long as you can To help keep warm you can get out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises
214. ler in the Index 2 19 Make sure the shift lever is fully into PARK P NEUTRAL In this position your engine range before starting the engine Your Pontiac has a doesn t connect with the wheels To restart when you re brake transaxle shift interlock You must fully apply already moving use NEUTRAL only Also use vour regular brakes before you can shift from PARK P NEUTRAL when your vehicle is being towed when the ignition is 1n RUN If you cannot shift out of PARK P ease pressure on the shift lever by pushing it all the way into PARK P while keeping the brake pedal pushed down Release the shift lever button if you have console shift Then move the shift lever out of PARK P being sure to press the shift lever button if you have a console shift See Shifting Out of PARK P in the Index REVERSE R Use this gear to back up NOTICE Shifting to REVERSE while your vehicle is moving forward could damage your transaxle Shift to REVERSE R only after your vehicle is stopped Shifting out of PARK P or NEUTRAL N while your engine is racing running at high speed is dangerous Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal your vehicle could move very rapidly You could lose control and hit people or objects Don t shift out of PARK P or NEUTRAL N while your engine is racing NOTICE Damage to your transaxle caused by shifting out of PARK P or NEUTRAL
215. m deadly carbon monoxide CO from your exhaust can get into your vehicle see Carbon Monoxide in the Index Dirt and water can too Safety Chains You should always attach chains between your vehicle and your trailer Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to the road if it becomes separated from the hitch Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer or hy the trailer manufacturer Follow the manufacturer s recommendation for attaching safety chains and do not attach them to the bumper Always leave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig never allow safety chains to drag on the ground Trailer Brakes Because you have anti lock brakes do not try to tap into your vehicle s brake system If you do both brake systems won t work well or at all 4 35 Driving with a Trailer Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience Before setting out for the open road you ll want to get to know your rig Acquaint yourself with the feel of handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as responsive as your vehicle is by itself Before you start check the trailer hitch and platform and attachments safety chains electrical connector lamps tires and mirror adjustment If the trailer has electric brakes start yo
216. m will arm when yau lock the doors with your key chain transmitter The key must be removed from the ignition when you lock the doors or the Content Theft Deterrent System will not arm Your Content Theft Deterrent System will disarm when you unlock the doors with the keys or your key chain transmitter Mode 2 Key Chain Transmitter Arm Disarm Only Your Content Theft Deterrent System will arm when you lock the doors with your key chain transmitter The key must be removed from the ignition when yau lock the doors or the Content Theft Deterrent System will not arm Your Content Theft Deterrent System will disarm when you unlock the doors with your key chain transmitter Special Note While this mode provides increased security it can be a problem if your key chain transmitter is damaged lost or if it fails to operate for any reason While the Content Theft Deterrent System 15 armed The Content Theft Deterrent System must be disarmed for the engine to run and while in mode 2 your key longer disarm the system Mode 3 Full Arming and Disarming Your Content Theft Deterrent system will arm when you lock the doors using either power lock switch while any door is open and the key is removed from the ignition Your Content Theft Deterrent System will arm when you lock the doors with your key chain transmitter The key must be removed from the ignition when you lock the doors or the Content Theft Deterrent System will
217. mbols are on some of your controls These symbols have to do with your lampa These symbols une mmportani far you and your passengers whenever your Far example these symbols are used on an original battery rehi ale MASTER PF WINDSHIELD CAUTION ven LIGHTING WIPER POSSIBLE 9 SWITCH INJURY E DOOR LOCK TURN WINDSHIELD ee UNLOCK as qe gt ERES i SHIELDING PARKING Z oris WINDSHIELD BATTERY FASTEN Fa ACID COULD w SEAT DEFROS CAUSE BELTS HAZARD BURNS WARNING AN FLASHER REAR AVOID WINDOW OWER DEFOGGER FLAMES POW DAYTIME WINDOW L RUNNING LAMPS VEHTILATING FOG LAMPS x D FAN AIR BAG rt These symbals are used on warning und indicator lights some other symbols WOU mary see ENGINE COOLANT TEMP BATTERY indien SYSTEM SPEAKER ENGINE OIL usur d ANTILOCK nas BRAKES ABS NOTES vi Y Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems Here you ll find information about the seats in your Pontiac and how to use your safety belts properly You can also learn about some things you should nor do with air bags and safety belts Seats and Controls Manual Seats Power Seats Reclining Front Seatbacks Seatback Latches Why Safety Belts Work Questions Many People Ask About Safety Belts 1 14 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly 1 21 Sa
218. mit signs near curves warn that you should adjust your speed Of course the posted speeds are based good weather and road conditions Under less favorable conditions you ll want to go slower 4 11 If you need to reduce your speed as you approach curve do it before you enter the curve while your front wheels are straight ahead Try to adjust your speed so you can drive through the curve Maintain reasonable steady speed Wait to accelerate until you are out of the curve and then accelerate gently into the straightaway Steering in Emergencies There are times when steering can be more effective than braking For example you come over a hill and find truck stopped in your lane or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere or a child darts out from between parked cars and stops right in front of you You can avoid these problems by braking if you can stop in time But sometimes you can t there isn t room That s the time for evasive action steering around the problem Your Pontiac can perform very well in emergencies like these First apply your brakes See Braking in Emergencies earlier in this section It is better to remove as much speed as you can from a possible collision Then steer around the problem to the left or right depending on the space available An emergency like this requires close attention and a quick decision If you are holding the steering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o clock
219. n the display will flash for two seconds indicating the feature is active Turn the radio on and insert the adapter This override feature will remain active until EJECT is pressed Stereo with Cassette Tape Player and Equalizer If Equipped Playing the Radio VOL Push this knoh to turn the system on and off To increase volume turn the knob clockwise Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume RECALL Display the time with the ignition off by pressing this knob When the radio is playing press this knob to recall the station frequency 3 15 Finding a 5tation Press this button to switch between AM and FM2 The display shows your selection TUNE Press this knob lightly so it extends Turn it to choose radio stations Push the knob back into its stored position when you re not using it SEEK Press the up or down arrow to go to the next higher or lower station and stay there PUSHBUTTONS The six numbered pushbuttons let vou return to vour favorite stations You can set up t 18 stations six six and six FM2 Just 1 Press AM FM to select the band Tune in the desired station 1 Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons until SET appears on the display Whenever you press that numbered button the station you set will return 4 Repeat the steps for each pushbutton Setting the Tone EQUALIZER A seven band equalizer ts part of your audio s
220. n a reclined position when your vehicle is in motion can be dangerous Even if you buckle up your safety belts can t do their job when you re reclined like this The shoulder belt can t do its job because it won t be against your body Instead it will be in front of you In a crash you could go into it receiving neck or other injuries The lap belt can t do its job either In a crash the belt could go up over your abdomen The belt forces would be there not at your pelvic bones This could cause serious internal injuries For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion have the seatback upright Then sit well back in the seat and wear your safety belt properly Head Restraints After someone gets into the rear seat area move the right front seatback to its original position Then move Slide the head restraint up or down so that the top of the the seat rearward until it looks restraint is closest to the top of your ears This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash Tn Eget oul tilt the seathack fully forward Seatback Latches 2 Door Models If the seatback isn t locked it could move forward a sudden stop or crash That could cause injury to the person sitting there Always press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is locked On two door models the right front seat is designed to make it easy to get in and out of the rear seat Tilt the right seatback fully forward the whole seat w
221. nd hold EJECT for five seconds to reset the CLN indicator The radio will display to show the indicator was reset CD Adapter Kits It is possible to use a CD adapter kit with your cassette tape player after activating the bypass feature on your tape player To activate the bypass feature the ignition must be on Turn your radio off Press TAPE PLAY and hold for three seconds After three seconds the tape symbol in the display will flash for two seconds indicating the feature is active Turn the radio on and insert the adapter This override feature will remain active until is pressed 38 AM FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player If Equipped Li pu 59 Playing the Radio VOL Push this knob to turn the system on and off To increase volume turn the knob clockwise Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume RECALL Display the time with the ignition off by pressing this knob When the radio is playing press this knob to recall the station frequency Finding a Station Press this button to switch between FMI and FM2 The display shows your selection TUNE Press this knob lightly so it extends Turn it to choose radio stations Push the knob back into its stored position when you re not using it SEEK Press the up or down arrow to go to the next higher or lower station and stay there PUSHBUTTONS The six numbered pushbuttons let you retu
222. nd not allowed to dry on the surface or they could stain Dry the finish with soft clean chamois or an all cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting High pressure vehicle washes may cause water to enter your vehicle Cleaning Exterior Lamps Lenses Use lukewarm or cold water a soft cloth and a liquid hand dish or vehicle washing mild detergent soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle Finish Care Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your Pontiac by hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint finish You can get GM approved cleaning products from your dealer See Appearance Care and Materials in the Index Your Pontiac has a hasecoat clearcoat paint finish The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored basecoat Always use waxes and polishes that non abrasive and made for a hasecoat clearcoat paint finish NOTICE Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on basecoat clearcoat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other salts ice melting agents road oil and tar tree sap bird droppings chemicals from industrial chimneys etc can damage your vehicle s finish if they remain on painted surfaces Wash the vehicle as soon as possible If necessary use non abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for painted su
223. nd then you apply the brake This of course shuts off the cruise control But you don t need to reset it Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed Push in the SET button then release the button and the accelerator pedal You ll now cruise at the higher speed Move the cruise switch from ON to Hold it there until you get up to the speed you want and then release the switch To increase your speed in very small amounts move the switch to for less than half a second and then release it Each time you do this your vehicle will go mph 1 6 km h faster The accelerate feature will only work after you set the cruise control speed by pushing the SET button Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control There are two ways Lo reduce your speed while using cruise control Once you re going about 25 mph 40 km h or more vou can move the cruise control switch from ON to R A Resume Accelerate for about half a second You ll go right back up to your chosen speed and Toslow down in very small amounts push the SET stay there button for less than half a second Each time you do this you ll go 1 mph 1 6 km h slower Push in the SET button until you reach the lower speed you want then release it Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control Use the accelerator pedal to increase vour speed When vou take your foot off the pedal your vehicle will slow down to the cruise control speed yo
224. nd tools away from any underhood electric fan Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and start a fire These include liquids like gasoline oil coolant brake fluid windshield washer and other fluids and plastic or rubber You or others could be burned Be careful not to drop or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine Hood Release To open the hood first pull the handle inside the vehicle It 15 located at the lower left side of the vehicle near the parking brake Next go to the front of the vehicle and release the secondary hood release Lift the hood 6 8 M ____________________________________ _ _ _ _ _ When you open the hood of the 3100 engine you ll see Engine Oil Dipstick A Windshield Washer Fluid B Radiator Fill Cap G Automatic Transaxle Dipstick Remote Positive Terminal H Brake Fluid Reservoir D Power Steering Fluid Reservoir L Engine Coolant Reservoir E Engine Oil Fill Cap J Air Cleaner 6 9 When you open the hood of the 3800 engine you ll see A Windshield Washer Fluid H Radiator Fill Cap C Remote Positive Battery Terminal D Power Steering Fluid Reservoir E Engine Oil Dipstick Engine Oil Fill Cap Automatic Transaxle Dipstick Brake Fluid Reservoir Engine Coolant Reservoir Air Cleaner a oe a 6 10 When you open the hood of the 3800 Supercharged engine you ll see
225. nditioning 6 73 Driver Position AER ee Sea ie 1 14 Remote rris rrr eas 1 63 dec Rn here ce Eat 2 8 How to Wear Properly M POOR dr EA E 1 14 Trunk Reuse aa o s e nun ELK CE a s 4 12 Income Usip are eee ens erre 1 17 1 61 1 62 Replacement pL EE Ta D gare ECC d SE AN 1 28 row aam Ca xr sx ada EE ES E Exe Ed 6 72 Lap Sbouljer c ornare TEE M 1 14 1 30 PAS o rov eL ui os 6 73 barrer Chilton os perre sess seu PI es 1 60 eet a dd eve 6 32 Questions and Answers 2 Bits eae d E Replacing Safety 5 1 64 Rear Guides as ayes che ieee eek ba lus 1 33 Reporting Safety Defects 8 10 Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions 1 30 Restraints Reir Passenger 2 2 2 222222222222 1 29 RE ssa see ene zac Reminder Light EA NEC UC ie wie II EN Replacing After a Crash EERE 1 64 Child rere XAR S TER RO pos ow v ve Te ATE oa Fa c a s Right Front Passenger Position 1 22 Held oiu AIE S E ERE dE eee SO MEHR n td Shoulder Belt Height 1 16 Replacing Parts After a Crash 1 64 Smaller Children and Babies
226. nge eligibility limitations and or to discontinue its participation in this program Both Pontiac and your Pontiac dealer are committed to making sure you are completely satisfied with your new vehicle Our experience has shown that if a situation arises where you feel your concern has not been adequately addressed the Customer Satisfaction Procedure described earlier in this section 1s very successful There may be instances where an impartial third party can assist in arriving at a solution to a disagreement regarding vehicle repairs or interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty To assist in resolving these disagreements Pontiac voluntarily participates in BBB AUTO LINE BBB AUTO LINE is an out of court program administered by the Better Business Bureau system to settle automotive disputes This program is available free of charge to customers who currently own or lease GM vehicle If you are not satisfied after following the Customer Satisfaction Procedure vou may contact the BBB using the toll free telephone number or write them at the following address BBB AUTO LINE Council of Better Business Bureaus Inc 4200 Wilson Boulevard Suite 800 Arlington V 22203 1804 Telephone 1 800 955 5100 To file a claim you will he asked to provide your name and address vour Vehicle Identification Number VIN and a statement of the nature of your complaint Eligibility is limited by vehicle age and mileage and
227. nger Push the magazine into the changer in the direction of the arrow marked on top of the magazine 3 24 Close the door by sliding it all the way to the left If the door is left partially open the changer will not operate and an error will occur When the door is closed the changer will begin checking for discs in the magazine This will continue for up to two minutes depending on the number of disces loaded To eject the magazine from the player slide the CD changer door all the way open The magazine will automatically eject Remember to keep the door closed whenever possible to keep dirt and dust from getting inside the changer All of the CD functions are controlled by the radio huttons except for ejecting the magazine Whenever a CD magazine with discs is loaded in the changer the compact disc symbol will appear on the radio display If the CD changer is checking the magazine far CDs the compact disc symbol will flash on the display until the changer is ready to play When a CD begins playing CD will appear in the bottom left corner and disc and track number will he displayed The dise numbers are listed on the ront of the magazine Compact Disc Errors If E and a number appear on the display an error has occurred and the compact disc temporarily cannot play The CD changer will send an error message to the receiver to indicate E30 Focus Error Tracking Error E32 Motor Error e E33 CD C
228. ngine and the rush of the wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy Don t let it happen to you If it does your vehicle can leave the road in less than a second and you could crash and be injured What can you do about highway hypnosis First be aware that it can happen Then here are some tips Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated with comfortably coal interior Keep your eyes moving Scan the road ahead and to the sides Check your rearview mirrors and your instruments frequently Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from driving in flat or rolling terrain If you get sleepy pull off the road into a rest service or parking area and take a nap get some exercise or both For safety treat drowsiness on the highway as an emergency 4 23 If you drive regularly in steep country or if you re planning to visit there here are some tips that can make your trips safer and more enjoyable Keep your vehicle in good shape Check all fluid levels and also the brakes tires cooling system and transaxle These parts can work hard on mountain roads Know how to go down hills The most important thing to know is this let your engine do some of the slowing down Shift to a lower gear when you go down a steep or long hill If you don t shift down your brakes could get so hot that they wouldn t work well You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill You coul
229. ngine transaxle Wheel assemblies and tires are forced to work harder against the drag of the added weight The engine is required to operate at relatively higher speeds and under greater loads generating extra heat What s more the trailer adds considerably to wind resistance increasing the pulling requirements If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer If you do here are some important points There are many different laws including speed limit restrictions having to do with trailering Make sure your rig will be legal not only where you live but also where you ll be driving A good source for this information can be state or provincial police Consider using sway control You can ask a hitch dealer about sway controls LR Don t tow a trailer at all during the first 1 000 miles 1 600 km your new vehicle is driven Your engine axle or other parts could be damaged Then during the first 500 miles 800 km that you tow a trailer don t drive over 50 mph 80 km h and don t make starts at full throttle This helps your engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer Don t drive faster than the maximum posted speed for trailers or no more than 55 mph 90 km h to save wear on your vehicle s parts Three important considerations have to do with weight
230. nging Flat Tire If a tire goes flat avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to level place Turn on your hazard warming flashers Changing a tire can cause an injury The vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over you or other people You and they could be badly injured Find a level place to change your tire To help prevent the vehicle from moving 1 Set the parking brake firmly 2 Put the shift lever in PARK P 3 Turn off the engine The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and be even more certain the vehicle won t move change a tire vou can put blocks at the front and rear of the tire farthest away from the one being changed That would be the tire on the other side of the vehicle at the opposite end i i lt lt Removing the Spare Tire and Tools The equipment you ll need is in the trunk Turn the center nut on the compact spare cover counterclockwise to remove it Lift and remove the cover Pull the carpeted mat up from the floor of the trunk Then lift and remove the cover Remove the spare tire 5 25 Turn the nut holding the jack counterclockwise and remove tools you ll be using include the jack A extension it Then remove the jack and wrench and protector guide and wheel wrench C If there is wheel cover loosen the plastic nut caps with the wheel wrench They won t come off Then using the flat end
231. not arm Your Content Theft Deterrent System will disarm when you unlock the doors with your key or your key chain transmitter Mirrors Electrochromic Day Night Rearview Mirror If Equipped Adjust all the mirrors so you can see clearly when you are sitting in a comfortable driving position Inside Day Night Rearview Mirror reduce glare from lamps behind you push the lever Your Pontiac may have electrochromic day night away from you to the night position To return the mirror rearview mirror Push the button on the bottom of the back to the day position pull the lever toward you mirror to turn this feature on The mirror will darken eradually to reduce glare from headlamps behind you This may take a few moments 2 53 One photocell on the front of the mirror senses when it is becoming dark outside Another photocell facing rearward senses headlamps behind you To turn the electrochromic feature off press the button on the bottom of the mirror again To keep the photocells operating well occasionally clean them with a cotton swab and glass cleaner Power Outside Mirrors The electric mirror control is near the driver s window on the armrest Turn the control to the left to adjust the left mirror or to the right to adjust the right mirror Then move the control in the direction you want to move the mirror 2 54 Convex Outside Mirror Your passenger s side mirror is convex convex mi
232. now required to contain additives that will help prevent deposits from forming in your engine and fuel system allowing your emission control system to function properly Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel In addition gasolines containing oxygenates such as ethers and ethanol and reformulated gasolines may be available in your area to help clean the air General Motors recommends that you use these gasolines if they comply with the specifications described earlier Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that contains methanol Don t use it It can corrode metal parts in your fuel system and also damage plastic and rubber parts That damage wouldn t be covered under your warranty Fuels Foreign Countries If you plan on driving in another country outside the United States or Canada the proper fuel may be hard to find Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel wouldn t be covered hy your warranty To check on fuel availability ask an auto club or contact a major oil company that does business in the country where you ll be driving You can also write us at the following address for advice Just tell us where you re going and give your Vehicle Identification Number WIN General Motors International Product Center 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8 7 Filling Your Tank Gasoline va
233. noxide CO into your vehicle even if the fan switch is at the highest setting One place this can happen is a garage Exhaust with CO can come in easily NEVER park in garage with the engine running If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into your vehicle Drive it only with all the windows down to blow out any CO and e Have your vehicle fixed immediately Another closed in place can be a blizzard See Blizzard in the Index 2 29 Power Windows Z CAUTION It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set Your vehicle can roll Don t leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to If you ve left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure your vehicle won t move even when you re on fairly level ground always set vour parking brake and move the shift lever to PARK P Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won t E e p j P m x Switches on the driver s door armrest control each of the move See Shifting Into PARK P in the Index ope veas n windows when the ignition is on In addition cach If you are parking on a hill and if you re pulling a passenger door has a switch for its own window trailer also see Towing a Trailer in the Index 2 30 The driver s window switch has an auto down feature This switch is labeled A
234. nspect air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions Replace filter if necessary An Emission Control Service See footnote Inspect camshaft timing belt An Emission Control Service ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY 7 21 78 000 Miles 130 000 km 81 000 Miles 135 000 km _ Change engine oil and filter or every Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service An Emission Control Service C Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote SERVICED BY ACTUAL MILEA GE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY T OL BIB 7 22 84 000 Miles 140 000 LI Change engine oil and filter or every Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service 87 000 Miles 145 000 km An Emission Control Service Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY 90 000 Miles 150 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and 3 months whichever occurs first Rotation in the Index for proper rotation An Emission Control Se
235. nterference that may cause undesired operation 2 8 This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry and Science Canada Operations is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device This system has a range of about 3 feet 1 m up to 30 feet 9 m At times you may notice a decrease in range This is normal for any remote keyless entry system If the transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer to your vehicle for the transmitter to work try this e Check to determine if battery replacement is necessary See the instructions that follow Check the distance You may he too far from your vehicle You may need to stand closer during rainy or snowy weather e Check the location Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal Take a few steps to the left or right and try again e If you re still having trouble see your Pontiac dealer or a qualified technician for service Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment Operation 3 Button Key Fob 4 Button Key Fob Remote All Door Lock To lock all doors press LOCK on the key chain transmitter see Power Door Locks in the Index for more details on power door lock features If your vehicle 1s equipped
236. o pass When you release the lever they will turn off Windshield Wipers You control the windshield wipers by turning the band marked WIPER For a single wiping cycle turn the band to MIST Hold it there until the wipers start then let go The wipers will stop after one cycle If you want more cycles hold the band on MIST longer For steady wiping at low speed turn the band to LO For high speed wiping the band further to To stop the wipers turn the band to OFF You can set the wiper speed for a long or short delay between wipes This can be very useful in light rain or snow Turn the band to choose the delay time The closer to LO the shorter the delay Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using them If they re frozen to the windshield carefully loosen or thaw them If your blades do become damaged get new blades or blade inserts Heavy snow or ice can overload your wipers A circuit breaker will stop them until the motor cools Clear away snow or Ice to prevent an overload 2 34 Windshield Washer At the top of the multifunction lever there s a paddle with the word PUSH on it To spray washer fluid on the windshield push the paddle The wipers will run for several sweeps and then either stop or return to your preset speed See Windshield Washer Fluid in the Index In freezing weather don t use your washer until the windshield is warmed Otherwise the washer fluid
237. o up over your abdomen The belt forces would be there not at the pelvic bones This could cause serious internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest vou 0 What s wrong with this You can be seriously injured if you wear the shoulder belt under your arm In a crash your body would move too far forward which would increase the chance of head and neck injury Also the belt would apply too much force to the ribs which aren t as strong as shoulder hones You could also severely injure internal organs like your liver or spleen The shoulder belt is worn under the arm It should be worn over the shoulder at all times 1 19 What s wrong with this You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt In a crash vou wouldn t have the full width of the belt to spread impact forces If a helt is twisted make it straight so it can work properly or ask vour dealer to fix it The belt is twisted across the body Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy Safety belts work for everyone including pregnant women Like all occupants they are more likely to he seriously injured if they don t wear safety belts To unlatch the belt just push the button on the buckle The belt should go back out of the way Before you close the door be sure the belt is out of the way If you slam the door it you can damage both the belt and your vehicle A pregnant woman s
238. oad or if its very hot the disc may not play and E error and a number may appear on the radio display 1f the disc comes out it could be that The disc is upside down dirty scratched or wet The air is very humid If so wait about an hour and try again If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can t be corrected please contact your dealer If your radio displays an error number write it down and provide it to your dealer when reporting the prohlem PREV 1 Press this button or the SEEK down arrow to go to the start of the current track if more than eight seconds have played If you hold the button or press it more than once the plaver will continue moving back through the disc NEXT 2 Press this button or the SEEK up arrow to go to the start of the next track if more than eight seconds have played If you hold the button or press it more than once the player will continue moving forward through the disc RDM 3 Press this button to hear the tracks in random rather than sequential order Press RDM again to turn off random play The radio will play during this operation REV 5 Press and hold this button to quickly reverse within track song Release it to play the passage You will hear sound at a reduced volume The display will show elapsed time FWD 6 Press and hold this button to quickly advance within a track song You will hear sound at a reduced volume The displa
239. oads 7T ul Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble On a wet road you can t stop accelerate or turn as well because your tire ta road traction isn t as good as on dry roads And if your tires don t have much tread left you ll get even less traction It s always wise to go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving The surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement 4 17 The heavier the rain the harder it is to see Even if your windshield wiper blades are in good shape a heavy rain can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals pavement markings the edge of the road and even people walking It s wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment in good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled with washer fluid Replace your windshield wiper inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on the windshield or when strips of rubber start to separate from the inserts 4 18 Driving too fast through large water puddles or even going through some car washes can cause problems too The water may affect your brakes Try to avoid puddles But if you can t try to slow down before you hit them Wet brakes can cause accidents They won t work as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to one side You could lose control of the vehicle After driving through a large puddle of water or wash apply your
240. of the vehicle s useful life We however urge that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded A good time to check your brakes is during tire rotation See Brake System Inspection under Periodic Maintenance Inspection in Part C of this schedule Long Trip Highway Maintenance Schedule 7 500 Miles 12 500 km C Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service pjRotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote ACTUAL MILEAGE do Long Trip Highway Maintenance Schedule 15 000 Miles 25 000 km 22 500 Miles 37 500 km L Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service C Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote Change engine oil and filter or every 12 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY 7 29 Long Trip Highway Maintenance Schedule 30 000 Miles 50 000 km 3 2
241. ollow those rules for everyone s protection First you ll want to know which restraint systems your vehicle has We ll start with the driver position Driver Position This part describes the driver s restraint system Lap Shoulder Belt The driver has a lap shoulder belt Here s how to wear it properly 1 Close and lock the door 2 Adjust the seat to see how see Seats in the Index so you can sit up straight 1 14 Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you Don t let it get twisted The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly Lf this happens let the belt go back slightly to unlock it Then pull the belt across you more slowly 4 Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure If the belt isn t long enough see Safety Belt Extender at the end of this section Make sure the release button on the buckle 18 positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to 5 make the lap part tight pull down on the buckle end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the thighs In a crash this applies force to the strong pelvic bones And you d be less likely to slide under the lap belt If you slid under it the helt would apply force at your abdomen This could cause serious
242. ollowing windshield washer fluid reservoirs Open the cap labeled WASHER FLUID ONLY Add washer fluid until the tank is full NOTICE Brake Fluid When using concentrated washer fluid follow the manufacturer s instructions for adding water Don t mix water with ready to use washer fluid Water can cause the solution to freeze and damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of the washer system Also water doesn t clean as well as washer fluid Fill vour washer fluid tank only three quarters full when it s very cold This allows for expansion which could damage the tank if it is completely full Don t use radiator antifreeze in your windshield washer It can damage your washer system and paint Your brake master cylinder reservoir is here It is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid 6 33 There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the reservoir might go down The first is that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal brake lining wear When new linings are put in the fluid level goes back up The other reason is that fluid is leaking out of the brake system If it is you should have your brake system fixed since a leak means that sooner or later vour brakes won t work well or won t work at all So it isn t a good idea to top off your brake fluid Adding brake fluid won t correct a leak If you add fluid when your linings are worn then you ll have too much
243. on has been detected on your vehicle Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and service may be required NOTICE If the Light Is Flashing The following may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle Reducing vehicle speed Avoiding hard accelerations Avoiding steep uphill grades If you are towing a trailer reduce the amount of cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible If the light stops flashing and remains on steady see IT the Light Is On Steady following If the light continues to Mash when it is safe to do so stap the vehicle Find a safe place to park your vehicle Turn the key off wait at least 10 seconds and restart the engine If the light remains on steady see If the Light Is On Steady following If the light is still flashing follow the previous steps and drive the vehicle to vour dealer or qualified service center for service 2 71 If the Light Is On Steady You may be able to correct the emission system malfunction by considering the following Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle If so reinstall the fuel making sure to fully install the cap The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn the light off Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water If
244. on of fuses circuit breakers and fusible thermal links in the wiring itself This greatly reduces the chance of fires caused by electrical problems Look at the silver colored band inside the fuse If the band is broken or melted replace the fuse Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size and rating Spare fuses are located in the Instrument Panel Electrical Center See Underhood Electrical Center in the Index Headlamp Wiring The headlamp wiring is protected by a circuit breaker in the underhood electrical center An electrical overload will cause the lamps to go on and off or in some cases to remain off If this happens have your headlamp system checked right away Windshield Wipers The windshield wiper motor is protected by circuit breaker and a fuse If the motor overheats due to heavy snow ete the wiper will stop until the motor cools If the overload is caused by some electrical problem have it fixed Power Windows and Other Power Options Circuit breakers the fuse panel protect the power windows and other power accessories When the current load is too heavy the circuit breaker opens and closes protecting the circuit until the problem ts fixed Instrument Panel Fuse Block Some fuses are in a fuse block located inside of the glove box behind a small bin on the right side To open pull on the plastic strap and pull the part out The fuse block is inside On the back e
245. ongest bones take the forces That s why safety belts make such good sense 1 12 It my vehicle has air bags why should I have to wear safety belts Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in most of them in the future But they are supplemental systems only so they work with safety belts not instead of them Every air bag system ever offered for sale has required the use of safety belts Even if you re in a vehicle that has air bags you still have to buckle up to get the most protection That s true not only in frontal collisions but especially in side and other collisions Q If I ma good driver and I never drive far from home why should I wear safety helts You may be an excellent driver but if you re in an accident even one that isn t your fault you and your passengers can be hurt Being good driver doesn t protect you from things beyond your control such as bad drivers Most accidents occur within 25 miles 40 km of home And the greatest number of serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph 65 km h Safety helts are for everyone How to Wear Safety Belts Properly Adults This part is only for people of adult size Be aware that there are special things to know about safety belts and children And there are different rules for smaller children and babies Hf child will be riding in your Pontiac see the part of this manual called Children F
246. ontrol systems SERVICE ENGINE SOON This system is called OBD II On Board Diagnostics Second Generation and is intended to assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of the vehicle helping to produce a cleaner environment In Canada OBD II is replaced by Enhanced Diagnostics The SERVICE ENGINE SOON light comes on to indicate that there is a problem and service is required Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system before any problem is apparent This may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle This system is also designed to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction If vou keep driving your vehicle with this light on after while your emission controls may not work as well vour fuel economy may not he as good and your engine may not run as smoothly This could lead to costly repairs that may not be covered hy your warranty This light should come on as a check to show you it is working when the ignition is on and the engine is not running If the light doesn t come on have it repaired This light will also come on during malfunction in of two ways Light Flashing A misfire condition has been detected misfire increases vehicle emissions and may damage the emission control system on your vehicle Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and service is required Light On Steady An emission control system malfuncti
247. onvenience net if equipped and remove 3 Remove the bulh by turning it 1 4 turn counterclockwise 4 Place the new bulb into the bulb socket 5 Turn the bulb 1 4 turn clockwise to replace Replace Unscrew the lower convenience net hook attachment the vent you removed earlier Pull the trunk trim carpeting back from the rear of 6 Close the trunk the trunk 4 Remove the upper trunk trim hook and the two plastic wing nuts from the taillamp 6 42 5 Caretully remove the taillamp assembly Be 6 Turn the lamp socket 1 4 turn counterclockwise careful to avoid scratching or chipping the paint lo remove on the vehicle Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement 1 Pull the windshield wiper arm away from the windshield 7 Remove the bulb 8 Place the new bulb into the socket 9 Tum the lamp socket 1 4 turn clockwise to replace it Lift the release clip with screwdriver and pull the 10 Carefully replace the taillamp assembly Be careful blade off the wiper arm to avoid scratching or chipping the vehicle paint ie Pee 3 Push the new wiper blade securely onto the 11 Reverse Steps 1 through 4 wiper arm 12 Close the rear compartment For wiper blade replacement length and type see Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts in the Index 6 44 Your new Pontiac cames with high quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer If vou
248. oors are opened Front Reading Lamps Rear Assist Handle Reading Lamps If Equipped There is a reading lamp provided in each rear assist handle Use the button next to each lamp to turn them on and off Koof Console Reading Lamps These lamps are part of the roof console They will go on when you open the doors When the doors are closed push the button next to each lamp to turn them on and off The console also contains an open starage bin If your Grand Prix has the optional sunroof you will have reading lamps in front of your sunroof switch Press the button behind each reading lamp to turn them on and off 2 43 Locks and Lighting Choices Your Pontiac s locks and lighting systems be programmed with several different features The features you can program depend on the options that came with your vehicle The following chart shows the features that can be programmed and which options you need to have to program them Feature Number Delayed Automatic LastDoor Remote of Chimes llumina Door Locks Closed Driver s Sounded tion Locking Door Exit Lockout Unlock Lighting Deterrent Control 2 44 Content Theft Arming Disarming Entering Programming Mode To program features your vehicle must be in this programming mode Follow these steps FUSE USAGE CHART CIRCUIT HREAKFHE The Content Theft Deterrent system if equipped must disarmed 2 R
249. oper location before raising the vehicle 3 Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle clockwise Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground for the spare tire to fit under the vehicle Remove all wheel nuts and take off the fTat tire 4 Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts mounting surfaces and spare wheel Rust or dirt on the wheel or on the parts to which it is fastened can make the wheel nuts become loose after a time The wheel could come off and cause an accident When you change a wheel remove any rust or dirt from the places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle In an CAUTION Continued 5 29 CAUTION Continued emergency you can use eloth or a paper towel to do this but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later if vou need to to get all the rust or dirt off Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts If you do the nuts might come loose Your wheel could fall off causing a serious accident 5 Replace the wheel nuts with the rounded end of the nuts toward the wheel Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel is held against the hub 6 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle counterclockwise Lower the jack completely 7 Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in a crisscross sequence as shown NOTICE Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage To avoid expensive brake repairs evenly tighten the wheel
250. or even fatal injuries The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining Forces The safety belt locks if there s a sudden stop or crash or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor 1 15 Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster 4 Door Models To move it down squeeze the release lever and move the height adjuster to the desired position You can move the adjuster up just by pushing up on the shoulder belt guide After you move the adjuster to where you want it try to move it down without squeezing the release lever to make sure it has locked into position Before you begin to drive move the shoulder belt adjuster ta the height that is right for you Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt is centered on your shoulder The belt should be away from your face and neck but not falling off your shoulder 1 16 What s wrong with this You can be seriously hurt if vour shoulder belt is too loose In a crash you would move forward too much which could increase injury The shoulder belt should fit against your body The shoulder belt is too loose It won t give nearly as much protection this way 1 17 0 What s wrong with this The belt is buckled in the wrong place 1 18 You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled in the wrong place like this In a crash the belt would g
251. or example if the trailer is too heavy the brakes may not work well or even at all You and your passenger passengers could seriously injured Pull a trailer only if vou have followed all the steps in this section Ask your Pontiac dealer for advice and information about towing a trailer with your vehicle Pulling a trailer improperly damage your vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered vour warranty To pull a trailer correctly follow the advice in this part and see your Pontiac dealer for important information about towing trailer with your vehicle Do not tow trailer if your vehicle is equipped with 3800 L67 supercharged engine Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with proper towing equipment To identify what the vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle you should read the information in Weight of the Trailer that appears later in this section But trailering is different than just driving your vehicle by itself Trailering means changes in handling durability and fuel economy Successful safe trailering takes correct equipment and it has to be used properly That s the reason for this part In it are many time tested important trailering tips and safety rules Many of these are important for your safety and that of your passengers So please read this section carefully before you pull trailer Load pulling components such as the e
252. order If you press PROG or SEEK while in the random mode discs and tracks will be scanned randomly Press this button again to turn off the random feature and return to normal operation REV 5 Press and hold this button to quickly reverse within a track As the CD reverses elapsed time will he displayed to help you find the correct passage FWD 6 Press and hold this button to quickly advance within a track As the CD advances elapsed time will he displayed to help you find the correct passage RECALL Press this button to see what track is currently playing Press RECALL again within five seconds to see how long the track has been playing EL TM will appear on the display when in elapsed time mode When a new track starts to play the track number will also appear Press RECALL a third time and the time of day will be displayed 3 26 SEEK Press the SEEK down arrow while playing CD to go back to the start of the current track if more than eight seconds have played If you press it again the changer will go to previous tracks Press the SEEK up arrow and it will go to the next higher track on the disc TAPE PLAY Press this button to play a CD if you have magazine loaded in the changer and the radio is playing To return to the radio while a CD is playing press You can also press this button to switch between cassette tape and CD rf both are loaded Theft Deterrent Feature THEFTLOCK is designed to
253. ort for parking and when driving at speeds below 20 mph 32 km h Steering effort will increase at higher speeds for improved road feel Steering Tips Driving on Curves It s important to take curves at a reasonable speed A lot of the driver lost control accidents mentioned on the news happen on curves Here s why Experienced driver or beginner each of us is subject to the same laws of physics when driving on curves The traction of the tires against the road surface makes it possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn the front wheels If there s no traction inertia will keep the vehicle going in the same direction If you ve ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice you ll understand this The traction you can get in a curve depends on the condition of your tires and the road surface the angle at which the curve is banked and your speed While you re in curve speed is the one factor you can control Suppose you re steering through sharp curve Then you suddenly accelerate Both control systems steering and acceleration have to do their work where the tires meet the road Unless you have the Trac System and the system is on adding the sudden acceleration can demand too much of those places You can lose control Refer to Trac System in the Index What should you do if this ever happens Ease up on the accelerator pedal steer the vehicle the way you want it to go and slow down Speed li
254. ou drive If you have any questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition see your Pontiac dealer This part tells you the maintenance services you should have done and when you should schedule them If you go to your dealer for your service needs you ll know that GM trained and supported service people will perform the work using genuine GM parts 7 4 The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in Part D Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses these AII parts should be replaced and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone else drives the vehicle These schedules are for vehicles that e curry passengers and cargo within recommended limits You will find these limits on your vehicle s Tire Loading Information label See Loading Your Vehicle in the Index are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal driving limits usethe recommended fuel See Fuel in the Index Selecting the Right Schedule First you ll need to decide which of the two schedules 15 right for your vehicle Here s how to decide which schedule to follow Maintenance Schedule Short Trip City Definition Short Trip City Intervals Follow the Short Trip City Maintenance Schedule ifa any one of these conditions is true for your vehicle e Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles 8 to 16 km This is particularly important when outside temperatures are below freezing e Most trips include extensive idling
255. ou press that numbered pushbutton the station you set will return 5 Repeat the steps for each pushbutton In addition to the four stations already set up to three more stations may be preset on each band by pressing two adjoining buttons at the same time Just 1 Tune m the desired station 2 Press SET SET will appear on the display 3 Press any two adjoining pushbuttons at the same time within five seconds Whenever you press the same buttons the station you set will return 4 Repeat the steps for each pair of pushbutton Setting the Tone BASS Slide the lever up or down to increase or decrease bass TREB Slide the lever up or down to increase or decrease treble If a station is weak or noisy you may want to decrease the treble Adjusting the Speakers BALANCE Turn the control behind the upper knob to move the sound to the left or right speakers The middle position balances the sound between the speakers FADE Turn the control behind the lower knob to move the sound to the front or rear speakers The middle position balances the sound between the speakers 3 11 AM FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player If Equipped Playing the Radio VOL Push this knob to turn the system on and off To increase volume turn the knob clockwise Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume RECALL Display the time with the ignition off by pressing this knob When the radio is playing press this knob to recall
256. our pass you need only slow down and drop back again and wait for another opportunity If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle wait your turn But take care that someone isn t trying t pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle Remember to glance over your shoulder and check the blind spot Check your mirrors glance over your shoulder and start your left lane change signal before moving out af the right lane to pass When you are far enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in vour inside mirror activate your right lane change signal and move back into the right lane Remember that your right outside mirror is convex The vehicle you just passed may seem to be farther away from you than it really 15 Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on two lane roads Reconsider before passing the next vehicle Don t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly Even though the brake lamps are not flashing it may be slowing down or starting to turn If you re being passed make it easy for the following driver to get ahead of you Perhaps you can ease a little to the right Loss of Control Let s review what driving experts say about what happens when the three control systems brakes steering and acceleration don t have enough friction where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked In any emergency don t give up Keep trying to steer and constantly seek an escape ro
257. p avoid hearing loss or damage Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably and clearly NOTICE Before you add any sound equipment to your vehicle like a tape player CB radio mobile telephone or two way radio sure you can add what you want If you can it s very important to do it properly Added sound equipment may interfere with the operation of your vehicle s engine Delco radio or other systems and even damage them Your vehicle s systems may interfere with the operation of sound equipment that has been added improperly 5o before adding sound equipment check with your dealer and be sure to check Federal rules covering mobile radio and telephone units Care of Your Cassette Tape Player A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause reduced sound quality ruined cassettes or a damaged mechanism Cassette tapes should be stored in their cases away from contaminants direct sunlight and extreme heat If they aren t they may not operate properly or may cause failure of the tape player Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every 50 hours of use Your radio may display CLN to indicate that you used your tape player for 50 hours without resetting the tape clean timer If this message appears on the display your cassette tape player needs to be cleaned It will still play tapes but you should clean it as soon as poss
258. phalt and concrete tire marked C may have poor traction performance Warning The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking straightahead traction tests and does not include cornering turning traction Temperature A B C The temperature grades the highest B and representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level af performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 109 Grades and represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law Warning The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed underinflation or excessive loading cither separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life and best overall performance Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are not needed However if you notice unusual tire wear or your
259. por is highly flammable It burns violently and that can cause very bad injuries Don t smoke if you re near gasoline or refueling your vehicle Keep sparks Names and smoking materials away from gasoline The is behind a hinged door the left side of your vehicle 1 While refueling hang the cap inside the fuel door To take off the cap turn it slowly to the left counterclockwise 55 0 If get gasoline on yourself and then something ignites it vou could be badly burned Gasoline can spray out on you if you open the fuel filler cap too quickly This spray can happen if your tank is nearly full and is more likely in hot weather Open the fuel filler cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise to stop Then unscrew the cap all the way Be careful not to spill gasoline Clean gasoline from painted surfaces as soon as possible See Cleaning the Outside of Your Pontiac in the Index When you put the cap back on turn it to the right Checking Things Under the Hood clockwise until vou hear at least three clicks Make sure you fully install the cap NOTICE If you need a new cap be sure to get the right type Your dealer can get one for you If you get the wrong type it may not fit or have proper venting and your fuel tank and emissions system might be damaged An electric fan under the hood can start up and injure vou even when the engine is not running Keep hands clothing a
260. r Fier ora aita ie 2 54 X II 6 26 Blood Valve durus RYE 5 2 Hester tie erae nte mnm m EB Recovery Tank 1 22 2 22 4 4244 4 5 16 GRA loses se 5 15 Courtesy Lamps 2 41 Courtesy Transportation 8 8 Eros ya bee ace look abe 2 35 acs 8 2709 2 55 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone Users 8 5 Customer Assistance Information 8 1 Customer Satisfaction Procedure Ave 8 3 Damage Lr Ears 6 62 Damage Sheet Rem 6 62 Daytime Running Lamps WX ac E a aes MEER 2 39 POAT AOR ee cen cin neni TROP FERE qot 5 3 Defects Reporting Safety 8 10 irc Ra Er yon 4 2 Defogger Rear Window 3 9 Defogping ee rmm Irene 3 4 Voc oer ir eaae acia da SIN SHIPS SEHE 3 4 Delayed Tllumination 2 41 2 45 Dimensions Vehicle aos 6 73 Dolby B Noise Reduction 3 14 3 17 Door Locks Hilt t M DECLA TELE DOR x ads 2 4 Driver Information Center 2 78 Postitsoam LU nly ib ea Fai caa Iri a ERR 1 14 Driver s Temperat
261. r 1 800 496 9993 Spanish In the 17 5 Virgin Islands 1 800 496 9994 In the Dominican Republic 1 800 751 4135 English or 1 800 751 4136 Spanish In the Bahamas 1 800 389 0049 In Bermuda Barbados Antigua and the British Virgin Islands 1 800 534 0122 In all other Caribbean countries 809 763 1315 In other overseas locations call GM International Product Center in Canada at 905 644 4112 For prompt assistance please have the following information available to give the Customer Assistance Representative 6 Your name address home and business telephone numbers Vehicle Identification Number This is available from the vehicle registration or title or the plate at the top left of the instrument panel and visible through the windshield Dealership name and location Vehicle delivery date and present mileage e Nature of concern We encourage you to call us so we can give your inquiry prompt attention However 1f you wish to write Pontiac address your inquiry to Pontiac Customer Assistance Center One Pontiac Plaza Pontiac MI 48340 2952 In Canada write to General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario LIH 8 7 Refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for addresses of GM Overseas offices When contacting Pontiac please remember that your concern will likely be resolved in the dealership using
262. r in the Index If you have the 3800 engine VIN Code use regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher If you re using fuel rated at the recommended octane or higher and you still hear heavy knocking your engine needs service But don t worry if you hear a little pinging noise when you re accelerating or driving up a hill That s normal and you don t have to buy a higher octane fuel to get rid of pinging It s the heavy constant knock that means you have a problem If you have the 3800 Supercharged engine VIN Code 1 use premium unleaded gasoline rated at 91 octane or higher With the 3800 Supercharged engine in an emergency vou may be able to use a lower octane s low as 87 if heavy knocking does not occur If you are using 91 or higher octane unleaded gasoline and you still hear heavy knocking your engine needs service Ata minimum the gasoline you use should meet specifications ASTM D4814 in the United States and CGSB 3 5 M93 in Canada Improved gasoline specifications have been developed by the American Automobile Manufacturers Association A AMA for better vehicle performance and engine protection Gasolines meeting the AAMA specification could provide improved driveability and emission control system protection compared to other gasolines Be sure the posted octane for premium is at least 91 at least 89 for middle grade and 87 for regular If the octane 1 less than 87 you may get a heavy knoc
263. r on top of vour vehicle The vehicle is used for delivery service police taxi or other commercial application Driving under these conditions causes engine oil to break down sooner If any one of these 15 true for your vehicle then you need to change your oil and filter every 3 000 miles 5 000 km or 3 months whichever occurs first See Change Oil Indicator in the Index If none of them is true use the long trip highway maintenance schedule Change the oil and filter every 7 500 miles 12 500 km or 12 months whichever occurs first Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine under highway conditions causes engine oil to break down slower See Change Indicator in the Index 6 18 What to Do with Used Oil Did you know that used engine oil contains certain elements that may be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer Don t let used stay on your skin for very long Clean your skin and nails with soap and water or a good hand cleaner Wash or properly throw away clothing or rags containing used engine oil See the manufacturer s warnings about the use and disposal of oil products Used oil can be a real threat to the environment If you change your own oil be sure to drain all free flowing oil from the filter hefore disposal Don t ever dispose of oil by putting it in the trash pouring it on the ground into sewers or into streams or bodies of water Instead recycle it by t
264. r station and stay there PUSHBUTTONS The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations You can set up to 18 stations six six and six FMZ Just l Press to select the band 2 Tune in the desired station 3 Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons until SET appears on the display Whenever you press that numbered button the station you set will return 4 Repeat the steps for each pushbutton 3 22 Setting the Tone EQUALIZER A seven hand equalizer is part of your audio system Slide the levers up to boost or down to reduce frequency range Adjusting the Speakers BAL Press this knob lightly so it extends Turn it to move the sound to the left or right speakers The middle position balances the sound between the speakers FADE Press this knob lightly so it extends Turn it to move the sound to the front or rear speakers The middle position balances the sound between the speakers Push these knobs back into their stored positions when you re not using them Playing a Compact Disc The integral CD player can play 8 cm single mini discs Full size compact discs and mini discs are loaded in the same manner Insert disc partway into the slot label side up The player will pull it in If the ignition and the radio are on the disc will hegin playing If you want to insert a disc when the ignition is off first press EJECT If you re driving on a very rough r
265. raints use the belt system in your vehicle but the child also has to be secured within the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal injury The instructions that come with the infant or child restraint will show you how to do that Where to Put the Restraint Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat We at General Motors therefore recommend that you put your child restraint in the rear seat Never put a rear facing child restraint in the front passenger seat Here s why A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured if the right front passenger s air bag inflates This is because the back of a rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating air bag Always secure a rear facing child restraint in the rear seat You may however secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat Before you secure a forward facing child restraint always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go Or secure the child restraint in the rear seat SS c A child in a child restraint in the center front seat can badly injured by the right front passenger uir bag if it inflates Never secure a child restraint in the center front seat It s always better to secure a child restraint in the rear seat You may however secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front pas
266. re And dirt can easily get into your engine which will damage it Always have the air cleaner in place when you re driving 6 20 How to Check Add Check oil only when the engine is cold Allow the engine to cool two to three hours after running If vou remove the supercharger oil fill plug while the engine is hot pressure may cause hot oil to blow out of the oil fill hole You may be burned Do not remove the plug until the engine cools 1 Clean the area around the oil fill plug before removing it Remove the oil fill plug using a 3 16 inch Allen wrench 3 The oil level 1s correct when it just reaches the bottom of the threads of the inspection hole 4 Replace the oil plug with the O ring in place Torque to 88 Ih in 10 Automatic Transaxle Fluid When to Check and Change A good time to check your automatic transaxle fluid level is when the engine oil is changed Change both the fluid and filter every 50 000 miles 83 000 km if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions the fluid and filter do not require changing See Scheduled Maintenance Services in
267. re is a leak If you run the engine it could lose all coolant That could cause an engine fire and you could be burned Get any leak fixed before vou drive the vehicle Engine damage from running vour engine without coolant isn t covered your warranty Adding only plain water to your cooling system can dangerous Plain water or some other liquid like alcohol can boil before the proper If there seems to be no leak with the engine on check coolant mix will Your vehicle s coolant warning see if the electric engine fans are running If the engine system is set for the proper coolant mix is overheating and the key is on both fans should be With plain water or the wrong mix your engine running If they aren t your vehicle needs service could get too hot but you wouldn t get the How to Add Coolant to the Coolant overheat warning Your engine could catch fire Recovery Tank and vou or others could be burned Use a 50 50 mix of clean water and DEX COOL antifreeze If you haven t found problem yet but the coolant level isn t at the COLD mark add a 50 50 mixture of clean water preferably distilled and DEX COOL antifreeze at the coolant recovery tank See Engine Coolant in the Index for more information NOTICE In cold weather water can freeze and crack the engine radiator heater core and other parts Use the recommended coolant and the proper coolant mix
268. rfaces to remove foreign matter Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging weather and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period of years You can help to keep the paint finish looking new by keeping your Pontiac garaged or covered whenever possible Aluminum Wheels If Equipped Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild soap and water Rinse with clean water After rinsing thoroughly dry with soft clean towel wax may then be applied The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted surface of your vehicle Don t use strong soaps chemicals abrasive polishes abrasive cleaners or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because you could damage the surface Don t take your vehicle through an automatic vehicle wash that has silicon carbide tire cleaning brushes These brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels 6 61 Tires To clean your tires use stiff brush with a tire cleaner NOTICE When applying a tire dressing always take care to wipe off any overspray or splash from all painted surfaces on the body or wheels of the vehicle Petroleum based products may damage the paint finish Sheet Metal Damage If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal repair or replacement make sure the body repair shop applies anti corrosion material to the parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection Finish Damage Any stone chips fractures
269. ring in the RUP Front Seat Position 1 58 Top Strap PETIT ee TEN 1 53 Where to Put Ib i 1 82 Chee LIN ce 2 58 Circuit Br gkers and Fuses oo cei cha eee eed 5 66 RI aries 6 19 Cleaning Aluminum Wheela rrr mr 6 61 vk creta 6 56 E RR ale 6 39 Inside of Your Pontiac 6 55 Instrimmeut ne ee hee eee aD 6 58 Ere n 6 58 Outside of Your Pontiac 6 0 Special 12222 2 6 57 ___ SSS rs TAPER SE x a ad a dca 6 62 SOROR TER ATROCI FUR RH 6 57 dire 6 61 Windshield and Wiper Blades 222222222 6 59 Climate Cantal SYRE isses ren m mmm 3 2 Clock Setting die cs eri re ee ra Comm Tort uus cose tie Ea Ck aca RE 3 1 Compact res 3 32 Compact Disc Player 3 19 3 21 Compact Disc Player Errors a 23 3 25 Compact Spare Tire ada Rd EET san 2 34 Content Theft Deterrent 2 13 2 90 Control of a PU Ea ema e x S 4 6 TAME ora wale dXCERIEERE EUR 2 57 Convex Outside Mirro
270. rly or it might force the object into that person The path of an inflating air bag must be clear Don t put anything between an occupant and an air bag and don t attach or put anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any air bag covering When should an air bag inflate An air bag ts designed to inflate in a moderate to severe frontal or near frontal crash The air bag will inflate only if the impact speed is above the system s designed threshold level If your vehicle goes straight into wall that doesn t move or deform the threshold level is about 9 to 15 mph 14 to 24 km h The threshold level can vary however with specific vehicle design so that it can be somewhat above or below this range If your vehicle strikes something that will move or deform such as parked car the threshold level will be higher The air bag is not designed to inflate in rollovers side impacts or rear impacts because inflation would not help the occupant In any particular crash no one can say whether an air bag should have inflated simply because of the damage to a vehicle ar because of what the repair costs were Inflation is determined by the angle of the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down in frontal or near frontal impacts What makes an air bag inflate In impact of sufficient severity the air bag sensing system detects that the vehicle is in a crash The sensing system triggers a relea
271. rn the ignition switch to ON 2 The CALIBRATE TIRE PRESS button is under the instrument panel to the right of the steering column Press and hold the button for about three seconds The CHECK TIRE PRESS light will flash three limes and go out If the light doesn t go out after you press the CALIBRATE TIRE PRESS button see your dealer for service 3 The system completes the calibration process during driving During the first 10 to 20 miles 15 to 30 km of driving the system will not alert you if a tire 15 low or high After 20 to 80 miles 30 to 125 km the system will only alert you about pressure differences of 12 psi 85 kPa or more After 80 miles 125 km of driving the svstem will alert you if a tire is 8 psi 55 kPa different from the other three tires Tire Inspection and Rotation Tires should be rotated every 6 000 to 8 000 miles 10 000 to 13 000 km Any time you notice unusual wear rotate your tires as soon as possible and check wheel alignment Also check for damaged tires or wheels Sce When It s Time for New Tires and Wheel Replacement later in this section for more information 6 48 The purpose of regular rotation 15 to achieve more uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle The first rotation 15 the most important See Scheduled Maintenance Services in the Index for scheduled rotation intervals When rotating your tires always use the correct rotation pattern shown here Don t incl
272. rn to your favorite stations You can set up to 18 stations AM six and six FM2 Just 1 Press to select the band Tune in the desired station Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons until SET appears on the display Whenever you press that numbered button the station you set will return 4 Repeat the steps for each pushbutton 3 19 Setting the Tone BASS Slide the lever to the right or left to increase or decrease bass TREBLE Slide the lever to the right or left to increase or decrease treble If a station is weak or noisy you may want to decrease the treble Adjusting the Speakers BAL Press this knob lightly so it extends Turn it to mowe the sound to the left or right speakers The middle position balances the sound between the speakers FADE Press this knob lightly so it extends Turn it to move the sound to the front or rear speakers The middle position balances the sound between the speakers Push these knobs back into their stored positions when you re not using them Plaving a Compact Disc The integral CD player can play 8 cm single mini discs Full size compact discs and mini discs are loaded in the same manner Insert disc partway into the slot label side up The player will pull it in The compact disc symbol will appear on the display If the ignition and the radio are on the disc will hegin playing CD will appear on the 3 20 display next to
273. rom the vehicle until it cools down Wait until CAUTION Continued there is no sign of steam or coolant before opening the hood If you keep driving when your engine is overheated the liquids in it can catch fire You or others could be badly burned Stop your engine if it overheats and get out of the vehicle until the engine is cool NOTICE If your engine catches fire because you keep driving with no coolant your vehicle can be badly damaged The costly repairs would not be covered by your warranty If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine If you get the overheat warning but see or hear no steam the problem may not be too serious Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you Climb a long hill on hot day Stop after high speed driving 5 14 Idle for long periods in traffic Tow a trailer If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam try this for a minute or so l Turn off your air conditioner 2 Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan speed and open the window as necessary 3 If you re in a traffic jam shift to NEUTRAL otherwise shift to the highest gear while driving AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE D If you no longer have the overheat warning you can drive Just to he safe drive slower for about 10 minutes If the warning doesn t come back on you can drive normally If the warning continues pull over stop and park your vehicle ri
274. round clearance and tire or tire chain clearance to the body and chassis See Changing a Flat Tire in the Index for more information Used Replacement Wheels Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is dangerous You can t know how it s been used or how far it s been driven It could fail suddenly and cause an accident If you have to replace a wheel use a new GM original equipment wheel Tire Chains NOTICE If your Pontiac has P225 60R 16 size tires don t use tire chains They damage your vehicle because there s not enough clearance NOTICE Continued NOTICE Continued se another type of traction device only if its manufacturer recommends it for use on your vehicle and tire size combination and road conditions Follow that manufacturer s instructions To help avoid damage to vour vehicle drive slowly readjust or remove the device if it s contacting vour vehicle and don t spin your wheels If you do find traction devices that will fit install them on the front tires If you have other tires use tire chains only where legal and only when vou must Use only SAE Class 8 type chains that are the proper size for your tires Install them on the front tires and tighten them as tightly as possible with the ends securely fastened Drive slowly and follow the chain manufacturer s instructions If you can hear the chains contacting your vehicle stop and retighten them If the contact continues
275. rror s surface is curved so you can see more from the driver s seat convex mirror can make things like other vehicles look farther away than they really are If you cut too sharply into the right lane you could hit a vehicle on your right Check your inside mirror or glance over vour shoulder before changing lanes Storage Compartments Glove Box Use the master key to lock and unlock the glove box To open lift the right side of the latch Center Console Storage The center console also contains two cupholders To uccess the cupholders pull the cupholder door located just To open the armrest storage area pull up on the front behind the console shift lever The two cupholders will edge of the latch The console has cassette and CD inte upright position storage and commholder Just below the center ashtray is an open storage compartment In front of this you may have a smaller compartment for storing smaller items th tri Overhead Console If Equipped The optional overhead console has reading lamps storage compartments including one for your garage door opener and one for sunglasses and an accessory power outlet These features are explained on the following pages READING LAMPS To turn on or off either reading lamp press the switch next to 1t GARAGE DOOR OPENER You can store your garage door opener in the rear compartment of your overhead console and operate
276. rvice pattern and additional information Replace air cleaner filter See footnote An Emission Control Service CI Inspect fuel tank cap and lines for damage or leaks Inspect fuel cap gasket for any damage Replace parts as needed An Emission Control Service See footnote T For supercharged engines only Check the supercharger oil level and add oil as needed or every 36 months whichever occurs first See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in this section An Emission Control Service See footnote 7 ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY 7 24 93 000 Miles 155 000 km 96 000 Miles 160 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service An Emission Control Service 1 Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE SERVICE ED BY ACTUAL MILEAGE Short Trip City Maintenance Sched 99 000 Miles 165 000 km 100 000 Miles 166 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every C Inspect spark plug wires 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service An Emission Control Service Replace spark plugs An Emission Control Service Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the vehicle
277. s in one hour Of course as we ve seen it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks and how quickly the person drinks them But the ability to drive is affected well below a of 0 10 percent Research shows that the driving skills of many people are impaired at BAC approaching 0 05 percent and that the effects are worse at night drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0 05 percent Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of 0 05 percent or above driver with a BAC level of 0 06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a collision At a level of 0 10 percent the chance of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater at level of 0 15 percent the chance is 25 times greater The body takes about an hour rid itself of the alcohol in one drink No amount of coffee or number of cold showers will speed that up TI be careful isn t the right answer What if there s an emergency a need to take sudden action as when a child darts 1nto the street person with even a moderate BAC might not be able to react quickly enough to avoid the collision There s something else about drinking and driving that many people don t know Medical research shows that alcohol in a person s system can make crash injuries worse especially injuries to the brain spinal cord or heart This means that when anyone who has been drinking driver or p
278. s on when you are driving or when one of the gages shows there may be a problem check the section that tells you 2 64 what to do about it Please follow this manual s advice Waiting to do repairs can be costly and even dangerous So please get to know your warning lights and gages They re a big help Your vehicle may also have a driver information system that works along with the warning lights and gages Sec Driver Information System in the Index Safety Belt Reminder Light When the key is turned to RUN or START a chime will come on for about eight seconds to remind people to fasten their safety belts unless the driver s safety belt is already buckled The safety belt light will also come on and stay on for about 20 seconds then it will flash for about 55 seconds If the driver s belt is already buckled neither the chime nor the light will come on Air Bag Readiness Light l the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the engine or comes on when you are driving your air bag system may not work properly Have vour vehicle serviced right away There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument panel which shows SRS AIR BAG The system checks the air bag s electrical system for malfunctions The light tells you if there is an electrical problem The The air bag readiness light should flash for a few system check includes the air bag sensors the air bag seconds when you turn the ignition
279. same intervals The services shown at 150 000 miles 240 000 km should be performed at the same interval after 1 50 000 miles 240 000 km See Owner Checks and Services and Periodic Maintenance Inspections following Emission Control Service Footnotes t The U S Environmental Protection Agency or the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle s useful life We however urge that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded Y SERVICED BY A good time to check your brakes is during tire rotation See Brake System Inspection under Periodic Maintenance Inspection in Part C of this schedule 6 000 Miles 10 000 km 9 000 Miles 15 000 km 1 Change engine oil and filter or every Change engine oil and filter or every 3 months whichever occurs first 3 months whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service An Emission Control Service Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY 12 000 Miles 20 000 km Change engine oil and filter or every 15 000 Miles 25 000 km LJ Change engine oil and filter or
280. se of gas from the inflator which inflates the air bag The inflator air hag and related hardware are all part of the air bag modules inside the steering wheel and in the instrument panel in front of the right front passenger How does an air bag restrain In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or the instrument panel Air bags supplement the protection provided by safety belts Air bags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant s upper body stopping the occupant more gradually But air bags would not help you in many types of collisions including rollovers rear impacts and side impacts primarily because an occupant s motion is not toward those air bags Air bags should never be regarded as anything more than a supplement to safety belts and then only in moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions What will you see after an air bag inflates After an air bag inflates it quickly deflates so quickly that some people may not even realize the air bag inflated Some components of the air bag module the steering wheel hub for the driver s air or the instrument panel for the right front passengers bag will be hot for a short time The parts of the bag that come into contact with you may be warm but not too hot to touch There will he some smoke and dust coming from vents in the deflated air bags Air bag inflation doesn
281. senger seat but only with seat moved all the way back Wherever you install it be sure to secure the child restraint properly Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in your vehicle even when no child is in it Top Strap If your child restraint has a top strap it should be anchored If you need to have an anchor installed you can ask your Pontiac dealer to put it in for you If you want to install an anchor yourself your dealer can tell you how to do it For cars first sold in Canada child restraints with a top strap must be anchored according to Canadian law 1 53 Your dealer obtain the hardware kit and install it for 3 Pick up the latch plate and run the lap and shoulder you or you may install it vourself using the instructions portions of the vehicle s safety belt through or provided in the kit around the restraint The child restraint instructions Use the tether hardware kit available from the dealer will show you bow The hardware and installation instructions were If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child s face or specifically designed for this vehicle neck put it behind the child restraint Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Outside Seat Position You ll be using the lap shoulder belt See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restra
282. shtray just push it in all the way and let go When it s ready it will pop back hy itself NOTICE Don t hold a cigarette lighter in with your hand while it is heating If you do it won t be able to back away from the heating element when it s ready That can make it overheat damaging the lighter and the heating element 2 58 Sun Visors Accessory Outlet To block out glare you can swing down the visors You If your vehicle has a center console you have 12 volt can also swing them from front to side outlet It is on the passenger s side near the floor Visor Vanity Mirrors Remove the tethered cap to use the outlet NOTICE Adding some electrical equipment to your vehicle can damage it or keep other things from working as they should This wouldn t covered by your warranty Check with your dealer before adding electrical equipment and never use anything requiring more than 20 amps Open the cover to expose the vanity mirror If vour vehicle has the optional lighted vanity mirrors the lamps come on when you open the cover Purse Litter Bag Holder Sunroof If Equipped On the front of the center console to the right of the Your sunroof includes a sliding glass panel and a two accessory power outlet on the passenger s side of the piece sunshade The switch works only when the vehicle there is hook that can he used to hold a purse ignition or RAP is See Retained Accessory Pow
283. st be put on the driver s door to show the old mileage reading when the new odometer was installed Trip Odometer Your trip odometer tells how far you have driven since you last reset it To set it to zero press the RESET button on the right side of the instrument cluster Tachometer The tachometer displays the engine speed thousands of revolutions per minute rpm Do not operate the engine with the tachometer in the red area or engine damage may occur 2 63 Warning Lights Gages and Indicators This part describes the warning lights and gages that may be on your vehicle The pictures will help vou locate them Warning lights and gages can signal that something 15 wrong hefore it becomes serious enough to cause an expensive repair or replacement Paying attention to your warning lights and gases could also save you or others from injury Warning lights come on when there may be or is problem with one of your vehicle s functions As you will see in the details on the next few pages some warning lights come on briefly when you start the engine just to let you know they re working If you are familiar with this section you should not be alarmed when this happens Gages can indicate when there may be or is problem with one of your vehicle s functions Often gages and warning lights work together to let you know when there s a problem with your vehicle When one of the warning lights comes on and stay
284. system in several places around your vehicle You don t want the system to inflate while someone is working on your vehicle Your Pontiac dealer and the Grand Prix Service Manual have Let only qualified technicians work on your air information about servicing your vehicle and the air bag bag system Improper service can mean that your system To purchase a service manual see Service and air bag system won t work properly See your Owner Publications in the Index dealer for service NOTICE If you damage the cover for the driver s or the right front passenger s air hag the bag may not work properly You may have to replace the air bag module in the steering wheel or both the air bag module and the instrument panel for the right front passenger s air bag Do not open or break the air bag covers For up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is turned off and the battery is disconnected an air bag can still inflate during improper service You can be injured if you are close to an air bag when it inflates Avoid wires wrapped with yellow tape or yellow connectors They are probably part of the air bag system Be sure to follow proper service procedures and make sure the person performing work for you is qualified to do so The air bag system does not need regular maintenance 1 27 Center Passenger Position Lap Belt If your vehicle has a bench seat someone can sit in the center position When
285. t If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can t shift out of PARK P with column shift try this Turn the key to OFF Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4 Shift to NEUTRAL N start the engine and shift to the drive gear you want zn pn Have the vehicle fixed as soon as you can With Console Shift see Shift Lock Release section 2 28 Parking Over Things That Burn Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust parts under your vehicle and ignite Don t park over papers leaves dry grass or other things that can burn Engine Exhaust Running Your Engine While You re Parked It s better not to park with the engine running But if you ever have to here are some things to know Engine exhaust can kill It contains the gas carbon monoxide CO which you can t see or smell It can cause unconsciousness and death You might have exhaust coming in if Your exhaust system sounds strange or different Your vehicle gets rusty underneath Your vehicle was damaged in a collision Your vehicle was damaged when driving over high points on the road or over road debris Repairs weren t done correctly Your vehicle or exhaust system had been modified improperly Idling the engine with the air system control off could allow dangerous exhaust into your vehicle see the earlier Caution under Engine Exhaust Also idling in a closed in place can let deadly carbon mo
286. t a braking skid When you start your engine or when you begin to dnve away your anti lock brake system will check itself You may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test is going on and you may even notice that your brake pedal moves a little This 1s normal If there s a problem with the anti lock brake system this warning light will stay on or flash See Anti Lock Brake System Warning Light in the Index 4 7 The anti lock system change the brake pressure faster than any driver could The computer is programmed to make the most of available tire and road conditions Here s how anti lock works Let s say the road is wet You re driving safely Suddenly an animal jumps out in front of you You slam on the brakes Here s what happens with ABS A computer senses that wheels are slowing down If one You can steer around the obstacle while braking hard of the wheels is about to stop rolling the computer will As you brake your computer keeps receiving updates on work the brakes at each front wheel and at the wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly rear wheels 4 8 Remember Anti lock doesn t change the time you need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping distance If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you you won t have time to apply your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops Always leave enough room up ahead to s
287. t all driver and another air bag for the right front passenger in rollover rear side or low speed frontal crashes Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt properly whether or not there s an air bag for that person 1 22 Air bags inflate with great force faster than the blink of an eye If you re too close to an inflating air bag it could seriously injure you Safety belts help keep you in position before and during a crash Always wear your safety helt even with air bags The driver should sit as far back as possible while still maintaining control of the vehicle An inflating air bag can seriously injure small children Always secure children properly in vour vehicle To read how see the part of this manual called Children and the caution label on the right front passenger s safety belt There 15 an air bag readiness light on the instrument panel which shows SRS AIR BAG SRS AIR BAG The system checks the air bag electrical system for malfunctions The light tells you if there 15 an electrical problem See Air Bag Readiness Light in the Index for more information 1 23 How the Air Bag System Works The right front passenger s air bag is in the instrument panel on the passenger s side Where are the air bags The driver s air bag is in the middle of the steering wheel If something between an occupant and an air bag the bag might not inflate prope
288. tch the trailer tongue A should weigh 10 percent of the total loaded trailer weight B If you have a weight distributing hitch the trailer tongue A should weigh 12 percent of the total loaded trailer weight B After you ve loaded your trailer weigh the trailer and then the tongue separately to see if the weights are proper If they aren t you may be able to get them right simply by moving some items around in the trailer 4 34 Total Weight on Your Vehicle s Tires Be sure your vehicle s tires are inflated to the upper limit for cold tires You ll find these numbers on the Tire Loading Information label found on the inside of the trunk lid or see Loading Your Vehicle in the Index Then be sure you don t go over the GVW limit for your vehicle including the weight of the trailer tongue Hitches Its important to have the correct hitch equipment Crosswinds large trucks going by and rough roads are a few reasons why you ll need the right hitch Here are some rules to follow Your vehicle may have nonmetallic composite bumpers The bumpers on your vehicle are not intended for hitches Do not attach rental hitches or other bumper type hitches to them Use only frame mounted hitch that does not attach to the bumper Will you have to make any holes in the body of your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch If you do then be sure to seal the holes later when you remove the hitch If you don t seal the
289. te to achieve your comfort set point as quick as possible If you set the temperature for 60 F 16 C or 90 F 32 C the fan will go to it s highest speed unless you manually select a lower speed The system will maintain full cold or full hot operation al these settings Cold Weather Example When you start the vehicle in cold weather below freezing or after being parked overnight If your Driver Set Temperature is 73 F 23 C and you are in Full Automatic mode the system will automatically move the temperature doors to full hot The blower will start out at low speed and the blower speed will increase as the engine warms up The air will be delivered to the floor As the interior of the vehicle warms up to your desired comfort point the blower will decrease and the temperature door will move to a cooler position to maintain your desired comfort As the cabin warms up or the sun load increases the system could switch to air delivered to the windshield and the floor Defoe mode Hot Weather Example When you start the vehicle in Hot weather 80 F 27 C or after being parked during the day in full sun If your Driver Set Temperature is73 F 23 C and you are in Full Automatic mode The system will automatically move the temperature doors to full Cold The blower will he at low speed momentarily and then go to high blower The air intake will be recirculated for maximum cooling performance As the interior of the
290. te transmitter Trunk NOTICE When replacing the battery use care not to touch any of the circuitry Static from your body transferred to these surfaces may damage the transmitter It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk open because carbon monoxide CO gas can come into your vehicle You can t see or smell CO It can cause unconsciousness and even death Resynchronizing Your Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter If you must drive with the trunk open or if electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass through the seal between the body and Your Keyless Entry System uses a continually changing code for increased security Normally the receiver in your vehicle will keep track of this changing code Loss of synchronization will occur if the transmitter une trunk of the vehicle e Turn the fan on your heating or cooling Loss of synchronization will occur after battery system to its highest speed with the setting replacement if the transmitter is immediately on VENT That will force outside air into activated more than 16 times while out of range your vehicle See Comfort Controls in of the vehicle the Index If your key chain transmitter has stopped working you Ifyou have air outlets on or under the may need to resynchronize the transmitter to the vehicle instrument panel open them all the way receiver To do this press the LOCK and UNLOCK See Engine Exhaust in the Index buttons together and hol
291. teering column below the lock cylinder To use this slot first remove the trim cap Insert a key or screwdriver into the access slot and press the lock cylinder You will now be able to remove your key from the ignition Be sure to replace the trim cap after use If the car has a column mounted gear shift lever you will now also be able to shift your vehicle out of PARK For cars with center console mounted gear shift levers the second access slot is located on the night hand side of the console shift panel next to the shift lever Insert a screwdriver into the slot Pry the cap open using the screwdriver Be careful not to damage the cap Press down and hold You will now be able to shift your vehicle out of PARK P Performance Shifting If Equipped Press the performance shift button located on the side of the console shift knob to allow the transaxle to shift at higher engine speeds increasing acceleration performance If you have a vehicle with the option 3800 Supercharged engine the words Performance Shift will glow in the trip computer when the Performance Shift is in operation Downshifts will occur at lower percentage of accelerator use while you re in the performance shift mode Press the button again to return to normal shifting The transaxle will then shift at lower engine speeds increasing fuel economy 2 23 Parking Brake To set the parking hrake hol
292. the Index 6 21 How to Check Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transaxle VM fluid level if you have heen driving Because this operation can be a little difficult you may y choose to have this done at your Pontiac dealership Service Department At high speed for quite a while When outside temperatures are above 90 F 32 C If you do it yourself be sure to follow all the In heavy traffic especially in hot weather instructions here or you could get a false reading on the dipstick NOTICE Too much or too little ITuid can damage your transaxle Too much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts or exhaust system parts starting a fire Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check your transaxle fluid e While pulling a trailer To get the right reading the fluid should be at normal operating temperature which is 180 F to 200 F 82 C to 93 C Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles 24 km when outside temperatures are above 50 F 10 C If it s colder than 50 F 10 C you may have to drive longer 6 22 Checking the Fluid Level Then without shutting off the engine follow these steps Park your vehicle on a level place Keep the engine The transaxle fluid dipstick running handle is the red loop near With the parking brake applied place the shift lever the back of the engine in PARK
293. the compact disc symbol If you want to insert a disc when the ignition is off first press EJECT If you re driving on a very rough road or if it s very hot the disc may not play and E error and a number may appear on the radio display If the disc comes out it could be that The disc is upside down It is dirty scratched or wet Theair is very humid If so wait about an hour and iry again If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can t be corrected please contact your dealer If your radio displays an error number write it down and provide it to your dealer when reporting the problem PREY 1 Press this button or the SEEK down arrow to to the start of the current track if more than eight seconds have played If you hold the hutton or press it more than once the player will continue moving back through the disc NEXT 2 Press this hutton ar the SEEK up arrow to go to the start of the next track if more than eight seconds have played If you hold the button or press it more than once the player will continue moving forward through the disc RDM 3 Press this button to hear the tracks in random rather than sequential order Press RDM again to turn off random play REV 5 Press and hold this button to quickly reverse within a track song Release it to play the passage You will hear sound at a reduced volume The display will show elapsed time FWD 6 Press and hold this button
294. the station frequency 3 12 Finding a Station Press this button to switch between and FM2 The display shows your selection TUNE Press this knoh lightly so it extends Turn it to choose radio stations Push the knob back into its stored position when you re not using it SEEK Press the up or down arrow to go to the next higher or lower station and stay there PUSHBUTTONS The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations You can set up to 18 stations six AM six and six FM2 Just 1 Press AM FM to select the band Tune in the desired station Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons until SET appears on the display Whenever you press that numbered button the station you set will return Led 4 Repeat the steps for each pushbutton Setting the Tone BASS Slide the lever to the right or left to increase or decrease bass TREBLE Slide the lever to the right or left to increase or decrease treble If a station is weak or noisy you may want to decrease the treble Adjusting the Speakers BAL Press this knob lightly so it extends Turn this knob to move the sound to the left or right speakers The middle position balances the sound between the speakers FADE Press this knob lightly so it extends Turn this knob to move the sound to the front or rear speakers The middle position balances the sound between the speakers Push these knobs back
295. the vehicle outline TRAC SWITCH If your vehicle has the Trac System this is not available with the 3800 Supercharged engine you will have a disable switch on the far right side of your Driver Information Center Your Trac System is automatically activated when you turn the ignition on This switch will activate deactivate the Trac System If you need to disable the system such as when you are stuck and are rocking your vehicle back and forth push this switch See Stuck In Sand Mud Ice or Snow in the Index LOW TRAC This light will come on when your Trac System is limiting wheel spin or when your anti lock brake system is active See Trac System or Low Traction Light in the Index 2 79 Trip Computer If Equipped MPGALMI 1OO0KM 31040 and 3800 Engines 2 80 Hd A MPGALMI L 100KM PERFORMANCE SHIFT Damen E cim S FUEL USED LIFE INFORMATION am vGECOM e RANGE CENTER 3800 Supercharged Engine When you start your engine the trip computer will display a mode A lighted oval will appear to the left af the mode currently being used 2 81 Control Buttons The trip computer has three buttons that control 1s functions ENG MET Press this button to change the display from English to metric units or metric to English RESET Press this button for two seconds to reset the mode displayed MODE Press this button to chang
296. till have brakes but you don t have anti lock brakes The anti lock brake system warning light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN If the light doesn t come on then have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem 2 68 The Trac System warning light may come on for the following reasons turn the system off by pressing the TRAC button the warning light will come on and stay on To turn the system back on press the button again The warning light should go off See Trac System in the Index for more information The warning light will come on when you set your parking brake with the engine running and it will stay on if your parking brake doesn t release Fully If the system 18 turned on and the warning light stays on after your parking hrake is fully released it means there s a problem with the system It the Trac System warning light comes on and stays on for an extended period of time when the system is turned on and the parking brake is fully released your vehicle needs service Low Traction Light When your anti lock system is adjusting brake pressure to help avoid a braking skid this light will come on If you have the Trac System this light will also come on when the system is limiting wheel spin Slippery road conditions may exist if the low traction light comes on so adjust your driving accordingly The light will stay for
297. tion which grades tires by tread wear traction and temperature performance This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car tires The Uniform Tire Quality Grading system does not apply to deep tread winter type snow tires space saver or temporary use spare tires tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches 25 to 30 cm or to some limited production tires While the tires available on General Motors passenger cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these grades they must also conform to Federal safety requirements and additional General Motors Tire Performance Criteria TPC standards Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example tire graded 150 would wear one and a half 1 1 2 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction B C The traction grades from highest to lowest are A B and C and they represent the tire s ability to stop wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of as
298. to a clean section of the cloth 4 When you clean a stain from fabric immediately dry the area with a blow dryer to help prevent a cleaning ring 6 56 M M M _ _ _ _ Special Cleaning Problems Greasy or Oily Stains Stains caused by grease oil butter margarine shoe polish coffee with cream chewing gum cosmetic creams vegetable oils wax crayon tar and asphalt can be removed as follows 1 Carefully scrape off excess stain 2 Follow the solvent type instructions described earlier Shoe polish wax crayon tar and asphalt will stain if left on a vehicle s seat fabric They should be removed as soon as possible Be careful because the cleaner will dissolve them and may cause them to spread Non Greasy Stains Stains caused by catsup coffee black egg fruit fruit juice milk soft drinks wine vomit urine and blood can be removed as follows 1 Carefully scrape off excess stain then sponge the soiled area with cool water 2 Ifa stain remains follow the foam type instructions described earlier 3 odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine treat the area with a water baking soda solution teaspoon 5 ml of baking soda to 1 cup 250 ml of lukewarm water 4 If needed clean lightly with solvent type cleaner Combination Stains Stains caused by candy ice cream mayonnaise chili sauce and unknown stains removed as follows
299. to quickly advance within a track song You will hear sound at a reduced volume The display will show elapsed time RECALL Press this button to see what track is playing Press it again within five seconds to see how long it has been playing elapsed time The track number also appears when the disc is inserted you change the volume or when a new track starts playing Press this button to play the radio when a disc is playing The disc will stop hut remain in the player CD PLAY Press this button to change to the disc function when the radio is on EJECT Press this hutton to remove the disc or stop the disc and switch to the radio EJECT will work with the radio off AM FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player and Equalizer If Equipped Playing the Radio VOL Push this knob to turn the system on and off To increase volume turn the knob clockwise Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume RECALL Press this button briefly to recall the station being played or to display the clock If you press the knob when the ignition 1s off the clock will show for few seconds 3 21 Finding a Station Press this button to switch between AM and 2 The display shows your selection TUNE Press this knob lightly so it extends Turn it to choose radio stations Push the knob back into its stored position when you re not using it SEEK Press the up or down arrow to go to the next higher or lowe
300. top even though you have anti lock brakes Using Anti Lock Don t pump the brakes Just hold the brake pedal down and let anti lock work for you You may feel the system working or you may notice some noise but this 1s normal When your anti lock system is adjusting brake pressure to help avoid braking skid this light will come on See Anti Lock Brake System Active Light in the Index LOW TRAC Trac System Option Not Available with 3800 Supercharged Engine Your vehicle may have Trac System that limits wheel spin This is especially useful in slippery road conditions The system operates only if it senses that one or both of the front wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction When this happens the system reduces engine power and may also upshift the transaxle to limit wheel spin This light will come on when your Trac System 1s limiting wheel spin See Trac System Active Light in the Index You may feel or hear the system working but this is normal The Trac System operates in all transaxle shift lever positions But the system can upshift the transaxle only as high as the shift lever position you ve chosen so you should use the lower gears only when necessary See Automatic Transaxle in the Index 4 9 When the system is on and the parking brake is fully released this warning light will come on to let vou know if there s a problem with the system See Trac System Warning
301. tractors and anchorages are working properly Look any other loose or damaged safety belt and built in child restraint system parts If you see anything that might keep a safety belt or built in child restraint system from doing its job have it repaired Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in crash They can rip apart under impact forces If a belt is torn or frayed get a new one right away If your vehicle has the built in child restraint torn or frayed harness straps can rip apart under impact forces just like torn or frayed safety belts can They may not protect a child in a crash If a harness strap is torn or frayed get a new harness right away Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers and have them repaired or replaced The air bag system does not need regular maintenance 1 63 Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash If you ve had a crash do you need new safety belts or built in child restraint parts After very minor collision nothing may be necessary But if the safety belts or built in child restraint harness straps were stretched as they would be if worn during a more severe crash then you need new safety belts or harness straps 1 64 If safety belts or built in child restraint harness straps cut or damaged replace them Collision damage also may mean you will need to have safety belt built in child restraint or seat parts repaired or replaced New parts an
302. trip and have your full size tire repaired or replaced where you want You must calibrate the Tire Pressure Monitor after installing or removing the compact spare See Driver Information Center Controls and Displays in the Index Of course it s best to replace your spare with a full size tire as soon you can Your spare will last longer and be in good shape in case you need again When the compact spare is installed don t take your vehicle through an automatic vehicle wash with guide rails The compact spare can get caught on the rails That can damage the tire and wheel and maybe other parts of your vehicle Don t use your compact spare on other vehicles And don t mix your compact spare tire or wheel with other wheels or tires They won t fit Keep your spare tire and its wheel together NOTICE Tire chains won t fit your compact spare Using them can damage your vehicle and can damage the chains too Don t use tire chains on your compact spare If You re Stuck In Sand Mud Ice or Snow What you don t want to do when your vehicle is stuck is to spin your wheels too fast The method known as rocking can help you get out when you re stuck but you must use caution If you let your tires spin at high speed they can explode and vou or others could injured And the transaxle or other parts of the vehicle can overheat That could cause an engine compartment fire or other damag
303. u set earlier Using Cruise Control on Hills How well your cruise control will work on hills depends upon your speed load and the steepness of the hills When going up steep hills you may have to step on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed When going downhill you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep your speed down Of course applying the brake takes you out of cruise control Many drivers find this to be too much trouble and don t use cruise control on steep hills Ending Cruise Control There are two ways to turn off the cruise control Step lightly on the brake pedal OR Move the cruise switch to OFF Erasing Cruise Speed Memory When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition or shift into PARK P or NEUTRAL your cruise control set speed memory is erased Lamps The lamp controls are located on the lower left side of the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel They control these systems e Headlamps Taillamps Parking Lamps License Lamps Sidemarker Lamps Instrument Panel Lights Courtesy Lamps Fog Lamps 2 38 D Turn the knob to this symbol to turn on the headlamps and other operating lamps Turn the knob to this symbol to turn on the parking and other operating lamps without the headlamps Turn the knob to OFF to turn off the lamps Daytime Running Lamps Daytime Running Lamps DRL can make it easier for others to see t
304. ude the compact spare tire in vour tire rotation After the tires have been rotated adjust the front and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire Loading Information label Make certam that all wheel nuts are properly tightened See Wheel Nut Torque in the Index Rust or dirt a wheel or on the parts to which it is fastened can make wheel nuts become loose after a time The wheel could come off and cause an accident When you change wheel remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle In an emergency you can usc a cloth or a paper towel to do this but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later if you need to to get all the rust or dirt off See Changing a Flat Tire in the Index When It s Time for New Tires One way to tell when it s time for new tires 15 to check the treadwear indicators which will appear when your tires have only 1 16 inch 1 6 mm or less of tread remaining You need a new tire if any of the following statements true You can sec the indicators at three or more places around the tire You can see cord or fabric showing through the lire s rubber The tread or sidewall is cracked cut or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric e The tire has a bump bulge or split The tire has a puncture cut or other damage that can t be repaired well because of the size or location of the damage 6 49 Buyin
305. uminated entry is canceled The interior lamps will stay on while any door is opened and slowly fade out when all doors are closed The interior lamps stay on for up to 25 seconds after all doors have been closed if they have not been locked Delayed Illumination later in this section Delayed Illumination The Delayed Illumination feature will continue to illuminate the interior for 25 seconds after all the doors have been closed so that you can find the ignition and buckle your seat belt at night Delayed Illumination will not occur while the ignition 1s in RUN or ACCESSORY position After 25 seconds have elapsed the interior lamps will slowly fade out The lamps will fade out before the 25 seconds have elapsed if you Turn the ignition to the RUN or ACCESSORY position Lock all doors using your key chain transmitter if equipped Lock the doors using the power door lack switch To turn Delayed Illumination feature off or on See Locks and Lighting Choices in the Index 2 41 Exit Lighting So that you can see to exit the vehicle at night your vehicle is equipped with the Exit Lighting feature The interior lamps will illuminate for up to 25 seconds when you remove your key from the ignition After 25 seconds have elapsed the interior lamps will slowly fade The lamps will fade out before the 25 seconds have elapsed if you Turn the ignition to the RUN or ACCESSORY position Lock all
306. ur vehicle and trailer moving and then apply the trailer hrake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are working This lets you check your clectrical connection at the same time During your trip check occasionally to be sure that the load is secure and that the lamps and any trailer brakes are still working Following Distance Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer This can help vou avoid situations that require heavy braking and sudden turns Passing You ll need more passing distance up ahead when you re towing a trailer And because you re a good deal longer you ll need to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle before you can return to your lane Backing Up Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand Then to move the trailer to the left just move that hand to the left To move the trailer to the right move your hand to the right Always back up slowly and if possible have someone guide you 4 36 rss Making Turns NOTICE Making very sharp turns while trailering could cause the trailer to come in contact with the vehicle Your vehicle could be damaged Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering When you re turning with a trailer make wider turns than normal Do this so your trailer won t strike soft shoulders curbs road signs trees or other objects Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers Signal well in advance
307. ure Knob Automatic and Auxiliary Temp Control 3 5 Driving ETUR e eee ean va Seales 4 20 beeen ane CERES 4 2 enon 4 3 VA EIE 4 2 DUMONT a Lee ce cree nr m m 4 27 In Foreign Countries 2 2 6 5 asia Eee 4 17 te ael aic d ces i dcn 4 16 ERE CUBE e EE 4 11 On Grades While Towing a Trailer 2 4 37 On Hill and Mountain Roads Site doen s 4 23 On 3now and 51 row 4 26 Through Water Creer ar TIE M rue VOS 4 19 Tet Roads ooe Oene A MN 4 17 ae E er 4 25 With Trailer 4 36 ACTI Sarr RID OY A TG E XI 2 30 Bronken Deiving 224 210 eI Eau ad heels 4 3 Eiccrrical Equipment Adding 2 17 3 30 6 66 Hiectncal Sy sien 6 66 Blectrochromic Day Night Rearview Mirror 2 53 Electronic Climate Control 3 2 nid cr ax Ea wee ree X S 6 9 6 10 6 11 CAME Crus rir arava si DOCU E CICER EA 2 6 26 Coolant Hester ossa coe er nnn POETS 2 18 Coolant Devel Cheek 7 39 Coolant Temperature Gage Ar uim Coolant Temperature 2 74 Exhaust Es EDI Ea ECKE Eq 2 1 2 2 29 4 28 4 35
308. urn Signal and Lane Change Indicator The turn signal has two upward for right and two downward for left positions These positions allow vou to signal a turn or a lane change To signal turn move the lever all the way up or down When the turn is finished the lever will return automatically An arrow on the instrument panel will flash in the direction of the turn or lane change To signal a lane change just raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash Hold it there until you complete your lane change The lever will return by itself when you release it As vou signal a turn or a lane change if the arrow flashes faster than normal signal bulb may burned out and other drivers won t see your turn signal If bulb is burned replace it to help avoid an accident If the arrows don t go on at all when you signal a turn check for burned out bulbs and then check the fuse see Fuses and Circuit Breakers in the Index A chime will sound if you leave your turn signal on for more than 3 4 mile 1 2 km Headlamp High Low Beam To change your headlamps from low beam to high beam or high to low pull the multifunction lever all the way toward you Then release it When the high beams are on a light on the instrument panel also will on Flash to Pass When your headlamps are off pull the lever toward you momentarily switch on the high beams to signal that you are going t
309. ute or area of less danger Skidding In a skid a driver can lose control of the vehicle Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable care suited to existing conditions and by not overdriving those conditions But skids are always possible The three types of skids correspond to your Pontiac s three control systems In the braking skid your wheels aren t rolling In the steering or cornering skid too much speed or steering in curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force And in the acceleration skid too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal If you have the Trac System remember It helps avoid only the acceleration skid If you do not have the Trac System or if the system is off then an acceleration skid is also best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal If your vehicle starts to slide ease your foot off the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the vehicle to go If you start steering quickly enough your vehicle may straighten out Always be ready for a second skid 1f 1t occurs Of course traction is reduced when water snow icc gravel or other material is on the road For safety you ll want to slow down and adjust your driving to these conditions It is important to slow down on slippery surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control more limited
310. vehicle pulling one way or the other the alignment may need to be reset If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on smooth road your wheels may need to be rebalanced Wheel Replacement Replace any wheel that is bent cracked or badly rusted or corroded If wheel nuts keep coming loose the wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced If the wheel leaks air replace it except some aluminum wheels which can sometimes be repaired See your Pontiac dealer if any of these conditions exist Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need Each new wheel should have the same load carrying capacity diameter width offset and be mounted the same way as the one it replaces If you need to replace any of your wheels wheel bolts or wheel nuts replace them only with new GM original equipment parts This way you will be sure to have the right wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your Pontiac model Using the wrong replacement wheels wheel bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous It could affect the braking and handling of your vehicle make your tires lose air and make you lose control You could have a collision in which you or others could be injured Always use the correct wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts for replacement NOTICE The wrong wheel can also cause problems with bearing life hrake cooling speedometer or odometer calibration headlamp aim bumper height vehicle g
311. verheat and even catch fire You or others could PARK P before you release the parking brake be injured Don t leave your vehicle with the If torque lock does occur you may need to have another engine running unless you have to vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the pressure from the parking pawl in the transaxle so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine running be sure your vehicle is in PARK P and your parking brake is firmly set before you leave it After you ve moved the shift lever into the PARK P position hold the regular brake pedal down Then see if you can move the shift lever away from PARK P without first pulling it toward you or if you have a console shift lever without first pushing the button If you can it means that the shift lever wasn t fully locked into PARK P 2 27 Shifting of PARK Your Pontiac has a Brake Transaxle Shift Interlock You must fully apply your regular brakes before you can shift from PARK P when the ignition is in RUN See Automatic Transaxle Operation in the Index If you cannot shift out of PARK P ease pressure on the shift lever by pushing it all the way into PARK P while keeping the brake pedal pushed down Release the shift lever button if you have a console shift Then move the shift lever out of PARK P being sure to press the shift lever button if you have a console shif
312. vice Manual It tells you much more about how to service your Pontiac than this manual can To order the proper service manual see Service and Owner Publications in the Index Your vehicle has an air bag system Before attempting 10 do your own service work see Servicing Your Air Bag Equipped Pontiac the Index You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any service work you perform See Maintenance Record in the Index You can be injured and your vehicle could be damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle without knowing enough about it e Be sure you have sufficient knowledge experience the proper replacement parts and tools before you attempt any vehicle maintenance task Be sure to use the proper nuts bolts and other fasteners English and metric fasteners can be easily confused If you use the wrong fasteners parts can later break or fall off You could be hurt Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Vehicle Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can affect the airflow around it This may cause wind noise and affect windshield washer performance Check with your Pontiac dealer before adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle Fuel The 8th digit of your vehicle identification number VIN shows the code letter for your engine You will find the VIN at the top left of your instrument panel See Vehicle Identification Numbe
313. wheels will spin and polish the surface under the tires even more Your anti lock brakes improve your vehicle s stability when you make a hard stop on a slippery road Even though you have the anti lock braking system you ll want to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement See Anti Lock in the Index Allow greater following distance any slippery road Watch for slippery spots The road might be fine until you hit spot that s covered with ice On an otherwise clear road ice patches may appear in shaded areas where the sun can t reach around clumps of trees behind buildings or under bridges Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass may remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear If you see a patch of ice ahead of you brake before you are on it Try not to brake while you re actually on the ice and avoid sudden steering maneuvers If You re Caught in a Blizzard If you are stopped by heavy snow you could be in a serious situation You should probably stay with your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help and you can hike through the snow Here are some things to do to summon help and keep yourself and your passengers safe Turn on your hazard flashers 4 27 Tiea red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that you ve been stopped by the snow Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you If you have no blankets or extra clothing make body insu
314. with the Content Theft Deterrent system the LOCK button arm the system see Content Theft Deterrent in the Index for more details Remote Driver s Door and All Door Unlock When you press UNLOCK on the key chain transmitter only the driver s door will unlock If you press UNLOCK again within five seconds all the doors will unlock If you would like all doors to unlock the first me you press UNLOCK see Locks and Lighting Choices in the Index If vour vehicle 1s equipped with the Content Theft Deterrent system the UNLOCK button on the key chain transmitter will disarm the system see Content Theft Deterrent in the Index for more details Remote Trunk Release Press the trunk symbol on your key chain transmitter to open your trunk The transaxle must be in PARK P for this feature to operate Remote Alarm 1f Equipped When you press the born button on the key chain transmitter your vehicle s headlamps will flash and the horn will sound This will allow you to attract attention if needed Remote Lock Unlock Confirmation If Equipped This feature provides feedback to the holder of the key chain transmitter that a command has been received by 2 9 the Remote Lock Control receiver To signal that a command has been received the headlamps will flash and the horn will sound briefly To program the various modes available see Locks and Lighting Choices in the Index Matching Transmitter s To
315. y need to reduce the damage detection sensitivity Try programming your Content Theft Deterrent to mode 1 see Locks and Lighting Choices in the Index If you continue to experience nuisance alarms you may want to try turning off damage detection by programming your Content Theft Deterrent to mode 2 see Locks and Lighting Choices in the Index If you are still having trouble with nuisance alarms you can turn off the Content Theft Deterrent system by programming your Content Theft Deterrent to mode 3 see Locks and Lighting Choices in the Index See your dealer or a qualified technician for service 2 14 5 New Vehicle Break In NOTICE Your modern Pontiac doesn t need an elaborate break in But it will perform better in the long run if you follow these guidelines Don t drive at any one speed fast or slow for the first 500 miles 805 km Don t make full throttle starts Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles 322 km or so During this time your new brake linings aren t yet broken in Hard stops with new linings can mean premature wear and earlier replacement Follow this breaking in guideline every time you get new brake linings Don t tow a trailer during break in See Towing a Trailer in the Index for more information Ignition Positions With the ignition key in the ignition switch you can turn the switch to five positions ACCESSORY A T
316. y pushing the button on the buckle La Move one side of the harness off the child s 1 Unfasten the shoulder harness clip shoulder and let the harness go all the way back 4 Move the other side of the harness off the child s shoulder and let it go all the way back 5 Remove the child from the child restraint cushion 1 50 Storing the Built in Child Restraint Always properly store the built in child restramt before using the vehicle s lap belt in the center rear seat position 1 Buckle the harness and fasten the harness clip 4 Then press the leg rest firmly into the seatback and secure it by pressing the upper corners against the fastener strips on the seatback Just like the other restraint systems in your vehicle your built in child restraint needs to be periodically checked 2 Fold the child restraint cushion and leg rest up and may need to have parts replaced after a crash See inia the Checking Your Restraint Systems and Replacing Seat i and Restraint System Parts After a Crash in the Index 3 Press the child restraint cushion firmly into the seatback 1 51 Child Restraints Be sure the child restraint 15 designed to be used in vehicle Hf it is it will have a label saying that it meets Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards Then follow the instructions for the restraint You may find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a booklet or both These rest
317. y s work don t plan to make too many miles that first part of the journey Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you can easily drive in Is your vehicle ready for a long trip If you keep it serviced and maintained it s ready to go If it needs service have it done before starting out Of course you ll find experienced and able service experts in Pontiac dealerships all across North America They ll he ready and willing to help if you need it Here are some things you can check before a trip e Windshield Washer Fluid Is the reservoir full Are all windows clean inside and outside Wiper Blades Are they in good shape Fuel Engine Oil Other Fluids Have you checked all levels e Lamps Are they all working Are the lenses clean Tires They are vitally important to a safe trouble free trip Is the tread good enough for long distance driving Are the tires all inflated to the recommended pressure Weather Forecasts What s the weather outlook along your route Should you delay your trip a short time to avoid a major storm system e Maps Do you have up to date maps Highway Hypnosis Hill and Mountain Roads Is there actually such a condition as highway hypnosis Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel Call it highway hypnosis lack of awareness or whatever There is something about an easy stretch of road with the same scenery along with the hum of the tires on the road the drone of the e
318. y will show elapsed time RECALL Press this button to see what track is playing Press it again within five seconds to see how long it has bcen playing elapsed time The track number also appears when the disc is inserted the volume 1s changed or when a new track starts playing Press this button to play the radio when a disc is playing The disc will stop but remain in the player CD PLAY Press this button to change to the disc function when the radio is on EJECT Press this button to remove the disc or stop the disc and switch to the radio will work with the radio off 3 23 Trunk Mounted CD Changer If Equipped With the optional compact dise changer you can play up to 12 discs continuously Normal size discs may played using the trays supplied in the magazine The small dises 8 cm can be played only with specially designed trays You must first load the magazine with discs before you can play a compact disc Each of the 12 trays holds one disc Press the button on the back of the magazine and pull gently on one of the trays Load the trays from bottom to top placing a disc on the tray label side down If you load a disc label side up the disc will not play and an error will occur Gently push the tray back into the magazine slot Repeat this procedure for loading up to 12 discs in the magazine Once you have loaded the discs in the magazine slide apen the door of the compact disc CD cha
319. you sit in a center seating position you have a lap safety belt which has no retractor To make the belt longer tilt the latch plate and pull it along the belt 1 28 To make the belt shorter pull its free as shown until the belt is snug Buckle position and release it the same way as the lap part of a lap shoulder belt If the belt isn t long enough sec Safety Belt Extender at the end of this section Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to Rear Seat Passengers It s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts Rear passengers who aren t safety belted be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash And they can strike others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts 1 29 Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions al Lap Shoulder Belt The positions next to the windows have lap shoulder belts Here s how to wear one properly 1 Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you Don t let it get twisted The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly If this happens let the belt go hack slightly to unlock it Then pull the belt across you more slowly 2 Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks Pull up on the
320. ystem Slide the levers up to boost or down to reduce frequency range Adjusting the Speakers BAL Press this knob lightly so it extends Turn it to move the sound to the left or right speakers The middie position balances the sound between the speakers FADE Press this knob lightly so it extends Turn it to move the sound to the front or rear speakers The middle position balances the sound between the speakers Push these knobs back into their stored positions when you re not using them Playing a Cassette Tape Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are 30 to 45 minutes long on each side Tapes longer than that are so thin they may not work well in this player While the tape is playing use the VOL FADE and BAL controls just as you do for the radio The display will show an arrow to show which side of the tape 1 playing When the down indicator arrow is lit selections listed on the bottom side of the cassette are playing When the up arrow is lit selections listed on the top side of the cassette are playing The tape player automatically begins playing the other side when it reaches the end of the tape 3 16 I If E and number appear on the radio display the tape won t play because of an error 10 The tape is tight and the player can t turn the tape hubs Remove the tape Hold the tape with the open end down and try to turn the right hub counterclockwise with a pencil Turn the tape over and r

0 - Pontiac

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents